Download 2005 Chrysler 300C SRT8

pictures.dealer.com

Download 2005 Chrysler 300C SRT8

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION PAGE

1 INTRODUCTION .............................................................3

2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ...........................9

3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ............................59

4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL .................................129

5 STARTING AND OPERATING ................................................179

6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES .............................................223

7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ..............................................235

8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES ................................................277

9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE .......................................293

10 INDEX ...................................................................303

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


CONTENTS

Introduction ........................... 4

How To Use This Manual ................. 4

Warnings And Cautions .................. 6

INTRODUCTION

Vehicle Identification Number .............. 6

Vehicle Modifications / Alterations .......... 7

1


4 INTRODUCTION

INTRODUCTION

This manual has been prepared with the assistance of

service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with

the operation and maintenance of your new vehicle. It is

supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet and

various customer oriented documents. You are urged to

read these publications carefully. Following the instructions

and recommendations in this manual will help

assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.

NOTE: After you read the manual, it should be stored

in the vehicle for convenient reference and remain with

the vehicle when sold, so that the new owner will be

aware of all safety warnings.

When it comes to service, remember that your dealer

knows your vehicle best, has the factory-trained technicians

and genuine Mopar parts, and is interested in

your satisfaction.

WARNING!

Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain

vehicle components contain or emit chemicals

known to the State of California to cause cancer and

birth defects or other reproductive harm. In addition,

certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products

of component wear contain or emit chemicals

known to the State of California to cause cancer and

birth defects or other reproductive harm.

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

Consult the table of contents to determine which section

contains the information you desire.

The detailed index, at the rear of this manual, contains a

complete listing of all subjects.

Consult the following table for a description of the

symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout

this owner’s manual:


INTRODUCTION 5

1


6 INTRODUCTION

WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS

This manual contains WARNINGS against operating

procedures which could result in an accident or bodily

injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures

which could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do

not read this entire manual you may miss important

information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

The vehicle identification number (VIN) is located near

the left front corner of the windshield. The VIN is visible

from outside of the vehicle through the windshield. This

number also appears on the Automobile Information

Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle.

Save this label for a convenient record of your vehicle

identification number and optional equipment.

VIN LOCATION

NOTE: It is illegal to remove the VIN plate.


VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS / ALTERATIONS

WARNING!

Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle

could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety

and may lead to an accident resulting in serious

injury or death.

INTRODUCTION 7

1


THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

CONTENTS

A Word About Your Keys .................11

▫ Ignition Key Removal ...................11

▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder ................12

▫ Horn ...............................12

Sentry Key ............................12

▫ Replacement Keys ......................13

▫ Customer Key Programming ..............14

▫ General Information ....................15

Illuminated Entry System .................15

Door Locks ...........................15

▫ Manual Door Locks .....................15

▫ Power Door Locks .....................16

▫ Child Protection Door Lock ...............18

Remote Keyless Entry ....................19

▫ To Unlock The Doors ...................19

▫ To Lock The Doors .....................20

▫ To Unlock The Trunk ....................20

▫ Using The Panic Alarm ..................20

▫ General Information ....................20

▫ Transmitter Battery Service ...............21

Vehicle Theft Alarm — If Equipped ..........22

2


10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Windows .............................23

▫ Power Windows .......................23

Trunk Lock And Release ..................26

Trunk Safety Warning ....................27

▫ Trunk Emergency Release ................27

Occupant Restraints .....................28

▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts .....................29

▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners ...................33

▫ Enhanced Driver Seat Belt Reminder System

(BeltAlert) ...........................33

▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women ............34

▫ Seat Belt Extender ......................34

▫ Driver And Right Front Passenger Supplemental

Restraint System (SRS) - Airbag ............35

Engine Break-In Recommendations ..........56

Safety Tips ............................56

▫ Exhaust Gas ..........................56

▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside

The Vehicle ..........................57

▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside

The Vehicle ..........................57


A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS

You can insert the double sided keys into the locks with

either side up.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11

Ignition Key Removal

The shift lever must be in PARK. Turn the key to the

LOCK position, then remove the key.

Vehicle Key Ignition Key Positions

The dealer that sold you your new vehicle has the key NOTE: The power window switches, radio, power

code numbers for your vehicle locks. These numbers can sunroof, and power outlets will remain active for 10

be used to order duplicate keys from your dealer. Ask minutes after the ignition switch has been turned off.

your dealer for these numbers and keep them in a safe Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The

place.

time is programmable through the electronic vehicle

2


12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

information center (EVIC). Refer to Personal Settings in

the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Section

for details.

WARNING!

Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous

for a number of reasons. A child or others could

be injured. Children should be warned not to touch

the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector

lever. Don’t leave the keys in the ignition. A child

could operate power windows, other controls, or

move the vehicle.

CAUTION!

An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always

remove key from the ignition and lock all doors

when leaving the vehicle unattended.

Key-In-Ignition Reminder

If you open the driver’s door and the key is in the ignition

switch, a chime will sound to remind you to remove the

key.

NOTE: The Key-In-Ignition reminder only occurs when

the ignition key is placed in the LOCK or ACC positions.

Horn

Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON position to

operate the horn.

SENTRY KEY

The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unauthorized

operation of the vehicle by disabling the engine.

The system will shut the engine off after 2 seconds of

running if an invalid key is used to start the vehicle. This

system utilizes ignition keys which have an electronic

chip (transponder) embedded into them. Only keys that

have been programmed to the vehicle can be used to start

and operate the vehicle.


The Sentry Key Immobilizer System does not need to be

armed or activated. Operation of the system is automatic

regardless of whether or not the vehicle is locked or

unlocked. During normal operation, the Theft Alarm/

Immobilizer Light will come on for three (3) seconds

immediately after the ignition switch is turned on for a

bulb check. Afterwards, if the bulb remains on, this

indicates a problem with the electronics.

If the bulb begins to flash after the bulb check, this

indicates that an invalid key has been used to start the

vehicle. Both of these conditions will result in the engine

being shut off after two (2) seconds of running.

Keep in mind that a key which has not been programmed

is also considered an invalid key even if it is cut to fit the

ignition lock cylinder for that vehicle.

If the Theft Alarm/Immobilizer Light comes on during

normal vehicle operation (vehicle has been running for

longer than 10 seconds), a fault has been detected in the

electronics and the vehicle should be serviced as soon as

possible.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13

NOTE:

• The Sentry Key Immobilizer System is not compatible

with remote starting systems. Use of these systems

may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of

security protection.

• Exxon/Mobil Speed Pass, additional Sentry Keys, or

any other transponder equipped components on the

same keychain will not cause a key-related (transponder)

fault unless the additional part is physically

held against the ignition key being used

when starting the vehicle. Cell phones, pagers, or

other RF electronics will not cause interference with

this system.

All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have

been programmed to the vehicle electronics.

Replacement Keys

NOTE: Only keys that have been programmed to the

vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle. Once

a Sentry Key has been programmed to a vehicle, it can

not be programmed to any other vehicle.

2


14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided

with a four digit PIN number. This number is required

for dealer replacement of keys. Duplication of keys may

be performed at an authorized dealer or by using the

Customer Key Programming procedure. This procedure

consists of programming a blank key to the vehicle

electronics. A blank key is one which has never been

programmed.

NOTE: When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer

System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to the

dealer.

Customer Key Programming

You can program new sentry keys to the system if you

have two valid sentry keys by performing the following

procedure:

1. Cut the additional Sentry Key Transponder blank(s) to

match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code.

2. Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch and

turn the ignition switch ON for at least 3 seconds but no

longer than 15 seconds. Turn the ignition switch OFF and

remove the first key.

3. Insert the second valid key and turn the ignition

switch ON within 15 seconds. After ten seconds a chime

will sound and the Theft Alarm Light will begin to flash.

Turn the ignition switch OFF and remove the second key.

4. Insert a blank Sentry Key into the ignition switch and

turn the ignition switch ON within 60 seconds. After 10

seconds a single chime will sound. The Theft Alarm Light

will stop flashing, turn on for 3 seconds; then turn off.

The new Sentry Key has been programmed. The Keyless

Entry Transmitter will also be programmed during this

procedure.

Repeat this procedure to program up to a total of 8 keys.

If you do not have a programmed sentry key, contact

your dealer for details.

NOTE: If a programmed key has been lost, see your

dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the systems

memory. This will prevent the lost key from starting

your vehicle. The remaining keys must then be reprogrammed.

All vehicle keys must be taken to the dealer at

the time of service to be reprogrammed.


General Information

The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules part 15

and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is

subject to the following conditions:

• This device may not cause harmful interference.

• This device must accept any interference that may be

received, including interference that may cause undesired

operation.

ILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM

The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the keyless

entry transmitter or open the doors.

The lights will fade to off after about 30 seconds or they

will immediately fade to off once the ignition switch is

turned ON from the LOCK position.

NOTE:

• None of the courtesy lights will operate if the dimmer

control is in the “defeat” position (extreme downward

position).

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15

DOOR LOCKS

Manual Door Locks

Lock the doors by pushing down on the door lock

plunger on each door trim panel.

Door Lock Plunger

If the door lock plunger is down when you shut the door,

the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the keys are not

inside the vehicle before closing the door.

2


16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

• For personal security and safety in the event of an

accident, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as

well as when you park and leave the vehicle.

• When leaving the vehicle always remove the key

from the ignition lock, and lock your vehicle. Do

not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or

with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised

use of vehicle equipment may cause severe personal

injuries and death.

Power Door Locks

A power door lock switch is on each front door trim

panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors.

Power Door Lock Switch

If you press the power door lock switch while the key is

in the ignition, and any front door is open, the power

locks will not operate. This prevents you from accidentally

locking your keys in the vehicle. Removing the key

or closing the door will allow the locks to operate. A

chime will sound if the key is in the LOCK or ACC

position and a door is open, as a reminder to remove the

key.


Automatic Door Locks

The doors will lock automatically on vehicles with power

door locks if all of the following conditions are met:

1. The Auto Lock feature is enabled.

2. The transmission is in gear.

3. All doors are closed.

4. The throttle is pressed.

5. The vehicle speed is above 15 mph (24 km/h).

6. The doors were not previously locked using the power

door lock switch or remote keyless entry transmitter.

The Automatic Door Lock feature can be enabled or

disabled. Refer to “Personal Settings” (Customer Programmable

Features) in the Electronic Vehicle Information

Center (EVIC) section of this manual for details.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17

Auto Unlock

The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with

power door locks if:

1. The Auto Unlock feature is enabled.

2. The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed

returned to 0 mph (0 km/h).

3. The transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK.

4. The driver door is opened.

5. The doors were not previously unlocked.

6. The vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h).

The Auto Unlock feature can be enabled or disabled.

Refer to “Personal Settings” (Customer Programmable

Features) in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center

(EVIC) section of this manual.

NOTE: Use the Auto Door Locks and Auto Unlock

features in accordance with local laws.

2


18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Child Protection Door Lock

To provide a safer environment for small children riding

in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with a child

protection door lock system.

WARNING!

Avoid trapping anyone in the vehicle in a collision.

Remember that the rear doors can only be opened

from the outside when the child protection locks are

engaged.

To activate the system, open the rear door and move the

child lock control, located near the door’s rear latch, to

the ON position.

Child Lock Control

When the child lock system is engaged the door can be

opened only by using the outside door handle even

though the inside door lock is in the unlocked position.


REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY

This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors, open

the trunk, or activate the panic alarm from distances up

to about 23 feet (7 meters) using a hand held radio

transmitter. The transmitter need not be pointed at the

vehicle to activate the system.

NOTE: If the key is in the ignition switch, then all

buttons on that transmitter will be disabled. The buttons

on the remaining transmitters will work. If the vehicle is

shifted out of PARK, all the transmitter buttons are

disabled for all keys.

Keyless Entry Transmitter

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19

To unlock the doors:

Press and release the UNLOCK button on the transmitter

once to unlock the driver’s door, or twice to unlock all

doors. The turn signal lights will flash twice to acknowledge

the unlock signal. The illuminated entry system also

turns on.

The headlights will also activate and remain on for 90

seconds (programmable) when the doors are unlocked

using the remote keyless entry transmitter. The time for

this feature is programmable. Refer to “Turn Headlamps

on with Remote Key Unlock” under “Personal Settings”

in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) section

of this manual for details.

NOTE: The system can also be programmed to unlock

all doors on the first press of the UNLOCK button. Refer

to “Remote Unlock Driver’s Door 1st” under “Personal

Settings” in the EVIC section of this manual.

2


20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

To lock the doors:

Press and release the LOCK button on the transmitter to

lock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash once to

acknowledge the lock signal. The horn will chirp once to

acknowledge the signal. If desired, the “Sound Horn On

Lock” feature can be turned on or off. Refer to “Personal

Settings” in the “Electronic Vehicle Information Center

(EVIC)” section of this manual for details.

To unlock the trunk:

Press the trunk button on the transmitter two times to

unlatch the trunk.

Using The Panic Alarm:

To turn the panic alarm feature ON or OFF, press and

hold the PANIC button on the transmitter for at least one

second and release. When the panic alarm is on, the

headlights and park lights will flash, the horn will pulse

on and off and the interior lights will turn on.

The panic alarm will stay on for 3 minutes unless you

turn it off by pressing the PANIC button a second time or

if the vehicle speed is 15 mph (24 km/h) or greater.

NOTE:

• The interior lights will turn off when the ignition is

switched to the ACC or ON position after the panic

alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights and

horn will remain on.

• When you turn off the panic alarm by pressing the

PANIC button a second time, you may have to be

closer to the vehicle due to the radio frequency noises

of the system.

To Turn Off “Flash Lights On Lock/Unlock”

NOTE: The Flash Lights On Lock/Unlock feature can

be turned on or off. Refer to Personal Settings in the

EVIC section of this manual.

General Information

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and

RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the

following conditions:

• This device may not cause harmful interference.


• This device must accept any interference received,

including interference that may cause undesired operation.

If your Remote Keyless Entry transmitter fails to operate

from a normal distance, check for these two conditions.

1. A weak battery in the transmitter. The expected life of

the battery is a minimum of three years.

2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station

tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB radios.

Transmitter Battery Service

The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032

battery.

NOTE: Do not touch the battery terminals that are on

the back housing or the printed circuit board.

1. With the transmitter buttons facing down, remove the

small screw, and separate the two halves of the transmitter.

Make sure not to damage the rubber gasket during

removal.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21

Separating Transmitter Halves

2. Remove and replace the battery. Avoid touching the

new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause

battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with

rubbing alcohol.

3. To reassemble the transmitter case, join the two halves

of the case together. Install and tighten the screw until

snug. Make sure there is an even “gap” between the two

halves. Test transmitter operation.

2


22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

VEHICLE THEFT ALARM — IF EQUIPPED

This system monitors the vehicle doors and ignition

switch for unauthorized entry or operation. When the

alarm is activated, the system provides both audible and

visual signals. The horn will pulse, headlights/park

lights will flash, the Vehicle Theft Alarm/Immobilizer

light, located on the instrument panel below the Electronic

Vehicle Information Center buttons will flash, and

the vehicle will not start. If the alarm is triggered and no

action is taken to disarm it, the system will turn off the

horn after three minutes and after 15 minutes of light

only operation the system will then rearm itself.

To arm the system: Remove the key from the ignition

switch and either:

1. Press a power door lock switch while the driver’s or

passenger’s door is open.

2. Press the LOCK button on the keyless entry transmitter.

After the last door is closed, or if all doors are closed, the

system will arm itself in about 16 seconds. During that

time, the Vehicle Theft Alarm/Immobilizer light will

flash. If it does not illuminate, the system is not arming.

If you open a door during this arming period, the system

will cancel the arming process. You must repeat one of

the previously described arming sequences to rearm the

system.

To disarm the system: Press the UNLOCK button on the

keyless entry transmitter. Also, using a valid sentry key

and moving the ignition switch to the ON/START position

will disarm the system. If something has triggered

the system in your absence, the horn will sound three

times when you disarm the system. Check the vehicle for

tampering.

NOTE:

• The driver’s door key cylinder and the trunk button on

the keyless entry transmitter cannot arm or disarm the

system.

• The system remains armed during trunk entry. Pressing

the trunk button will not disarm the system. If

someone enters the vehicle through the trunk and

opens any door the alarm will sound.


• When the system is armed, the doors can not be

unlocked from the interior power door lock switches.

The Vehicle Theft Alarm system is designed to protect

your vehicle, however, you can create conditions where

the system will give you a false alarm. If one of the

previously described arming sequences has occurred, the

system will arm regardless of whether you are in the

vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle and open a

door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the

system.

If the alarm system is armed and the battery becomes

disconnected the system will remain armed when the

battery is reconnected. The exterior lights will flash, the

horn will sound, and the ignition will not start the

vehicle. If this occurs, disarm the system.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23

WINDOWS

Power Windows

The window controls on the driver’s door control all the

door windows.

Power Window Switches

There are single window controls on each passenger door

trim panel which operate the passenger door windows.

The window controls will operate only when the ignition

switch is in the ON or ACCESSORY position.

2


24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

The window lock switch on the driver’s door allows you

to disable the window controls on the passenger doors.

When the lock switch is pressed the window controls on

the passenger doors will not illuminate and the passenger

windows will be disabled.

WARNING!

Never leave children in a vehicle, with the keys in

the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unattended

children, can become entrapped by the windows

while operating the power window switches.

Such entrapment may result in serious injury or

death.

Auto Down Feature

The driver door power window switch, and some model

passenger door power window switches have an auto

down feature. Press the window switch to the second

detent, release, and the window will go down automatically.

To open the window part way, press the window switch

to the first detent and release it when you want the

window to stop.

To stop the window from going all the way down during

the auto-down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.

The power window switches remain active for 10 minutes

after the ignition switch has been turned off. Opening

either front door will cancel this feature. The time is

customer programmable through the Electronic Vehicle

Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Delay Power Off to

Accessories Until Exit” under “Personal Settings” in the

Electronic Vehicle Information Center section of this

manual for details.

Auto Up Feature with Anti–Pinch Protection—If

Equipped

Lift the window switch to the second detent, release, and

the window will go up automatically.

To stop the window from going all the way up during the

auto-up operation, push down on the switch briefly.


To close the window part way, lift the window switch to

the first detent and release when you want the window to

stop.

The power window switches remain active for 10 minutes

after the ignition switch has been turned off. The

time is customer programmable through the electronic

vehicle information center (EVIC). Refer to “Delay Power

Off to Accessories Until Exit” in the Electronic Vehicle

Information Center section for details. Opening either

front door will cancel this feature.

NOTE: If the window runs into any obstacle during

auto-closure it will reverse direction and then stop.

Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again to

close the window.

NOTE: Any impact due to rough road conditions may

trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly during

auto closure. If this happens pull the switch lightly to the

first detent and hold to close window manually.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25

WARNING!

There is no anti-pinch protection when the window

is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the

window before closing.

Reset

Any time the vehicle battery is disconnected or goes dead

the auto-up function will be disabled. To reactivate the

auto-up feature perform the following steps after vehicle

power is restored:

• Pull the window switch up to close window completely,

then hold the switch for a second.

• Push the window switch firmly down to second detent

to open the window automatically until the window is

fully open.

2


26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Wind Buffeting

Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of

pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the

ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the

windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain

open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence

and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with

the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows

together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs

with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to

minimize the buffeting.

TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE

Trunk Release Button

Press the trunk button on the Remote Keyless Entry

Transmitter two times to open the trunk from outside the

vehicle. The trunk lid can be released from inside the

vehicle by pressing the Trunk Release Button located on

the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel. The

transmission must be in Park before the switch will

operate.


With the ignition ON, the trunk open symbol will be

displayed in the instrument cluster indicating that the

trunk is open. The odometer display will reappear once

the trunk is closed.

With the key in lock position or key out, the trunk open

symbol will be displayed until the trunk is closed.

TRUNK SAFETY WARNING

WARNING!

Do not allow children to have access to the trunk,

either by climbing into the trunk from outside, or

through the inside of the vehicle. Always close the

trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended. Once in

the trunk, young children may not be able to escape,

even if they entered through the rear seat. If trapped

in the trunk, children can die from suffocation or

heat stroke.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27

Trunk Emergency Release

Emergency Release

The trunk of your vehicle is equipped with an emergency

release handle. It is located on the inside of the trunk lid,

near the latch, and is coated so that it glows in a darkened

trunk. Pull on the handle to open the trunk.

2


28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS

Some of the most important safety features in your

vehicle are the restraint systems. These include the front

and rear seat belts for the driver and all passengers, front

airbags for both the driver and front passenger and, if so

equipped, left and right side curtain airbags for the

driver and passengers seated next to a window. If you

will be carrying children too small for adult-size belts,

your seat belts also can be used to hold infant and child

restraint systems.

Please pay close attention to the information in this

section. It tells you how to use your restraint system

properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as

possible.

WARNING!

In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer

much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled

up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or

other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the

vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your

vehicle are buckled up properly.

Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even

on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver

and cause a collision which includes you. This can

happen far away from home or on your own street.

Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they

can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some

of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown

from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of

ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the

inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should

be belted at all times.


Lap/Shoulder Belts

All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with

Lap/Shoulder Belts.

The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during

very sudden stops or impacts. This feature allows the

shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under

normal conditions. But in a collision, the belt will lock

and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle

or being thrown out.

WARNING!

It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,

inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people

riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously

injured or killed.

Do not allow people to ride in any area of your

vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.

Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and

using a seat belt properly.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29

WARNING!

• Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat

belts are designed to go around the large bones of

your body. These are the strongest parts of your

body and can take the forces of a collision the

best. Wearing your belt in the wrong place could

make your injuries in a collision much worse. You

might suffer internal injuries, or you could even

slide out of part of the belt. Follow these instructions

to wear your seat belt safely and to keep

your passengers safe, too.

• Two people should never be belted into a single

seat belt. People belted together can crash into one

another in an accident, hurting one another badly.

Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for

more than one person, no matter what their size.

Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions

1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and

adjust the front seat.

2


30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of your seat.

Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt. Slide the latch

plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make the belt

go around your lap.

Latch Plate To Buckle

3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch

plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”

WARNING!

• A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will

not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride

too high on your body, possibly causing internal

injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle

nearest you.

• A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well.

In a sudden stop you could move too far forward,

increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat

belt snugly.

• A belt that is worn under your arm is very

dangerous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces

of the vehicle in a collision, increasing head

and neck injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause

internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder

bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your

strongest bones will take the force in a collision.

• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect

you from injury during a collision. You are more

likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not

wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt

are meant to be used together.


4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your

abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up

a bit on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too

tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug

belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a

collision.

Removing Slack From Belt

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31

WARNING!

• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of

internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t

be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your

abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as possible

and keep it snug.

• A twisted belt can’t do its job as well. In a collision

it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt is straight.

If you can’t straighten a belt in your vehicle, take it

to your dealer and have it fixed.

5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is

comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor

will withdraw any slack in the belt.

6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.

The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position.

If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to

allow the belt to retract fully.

2


32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision

and leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt

system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose

parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.

Do not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt

assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they

have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,

etc.).

Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage

In the driver and front passenger seats, the shoulder belt

can be adjusted upward or downward to position the belt

away from your neck. Push and fully depress the button

above the webbing to release the anchorage, and then

move it up or down to the position that serves you best.

Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt

As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will

prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average,

you’ll prefer a higher position. When you release the

anchorage, try to move it up or down to make sure that

it is locked in position.

In the rear seat, move toward the center of the seat to

position the belt away from your neck.


Seat Belt Pretensioners

The seat belts for both front seating positions are

equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to

remove any slack from the seat belts in the event of a

collision. These devices improve the performance of the

seat belt system by assuring that the belt is tight about the

occupant in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size

occupants, including those in child restraints.

NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper

seat belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still

must be worn snugly and positioned properly.

The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint

Controller (ORC) (see Airbag Section). Like the

front airbags, the pretensioners are single use items. After

a collision that is severe enough to deploy the airbags and

pretensioners, both must be replaced.

Enhanced Driver Seat Belt Reminder System

(BeltAlert)

If the driver’s seat belt has not been buckled within 60

seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is

greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), the Enhanced Warning

System (BeltAlert) will alert the driver to buckle their seat

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33

belt. The driver should also instruct all other occupants to

buckle their seat belts. Once the warning is triggered, the

Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) will continue to

chime and flash the Seat Belt Warning Light for 96

seconds or until the driver’s seat belt is buckled. The

Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) will be reactivated

if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10

seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8

km/h).

The Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) can be enabled

or disabled by your authorized dealer or by

following these steps:

NOTE: The following steps must occur within the first

60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ON

or START position. DaimlerChrysler does not recommend

deactivating the Enhanced Warning System

(BeltAlert).

1. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and

buckle the driver’s seat belt.

2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and wait

for the Seat Belt Warning Light to turn off.

2


34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

3. Within 60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the

ON position, unbuckle and then re-buckle the driver’s

seat belt at least three times within 10 seconds, ending

with the seat belt buckled.

NOTE: Watch for the Seat Belt Warning Light to turn on

while unbuckling and off while re-buckling the seat belt.

It may be necessary to retract the seat belt.

4. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. A

single chime will sound to signify that you have successfully

completed the programming.

The Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) can be reactivated

by repeating this procedure.

NOTE: Although the Enhanced Warning System

(BeltAlert) has been deactivated, the Seat Belt Warning

Light will continue to illuminate while the driver’s seat

belt remains unbuckled.

Seat Belts and Pregnant Women

We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts

throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is

the best way to keep the baby safe.

Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt

across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.

Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the

abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take

the force if there is a collision.

Seat Belt Extender

If a seat belt is too short, even when fully extended and

when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if so

equipped) is in its lowest position, your dealer can

provide you with a seat belt extender. This extender

should be used only if the existing belt is not long

enough. When it is not required, remove the extender

and store it.


WARNING!

Using a seat belt extender when not needed can

increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use

when the seat belt is not long enough when it is

worn low and snug, and in the recommended seating

positions. Remove and store the extender when not

needed.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35

Driver and Right Front Passenger Supplemental

Restraint System (SRS) - Airbag

Front Airbag Components

This vehicle has front airbags for both the driver and

front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint

systems. The driver’s airbag is mounted in the center of

the steering wheel. The passenger’s front airbag is

mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove compartment.

The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the

airbag covers.

2


36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: The front airbags are certified to the Federal

regulations that allow less forceful deployment.

The front airbags have a multistage inflator design. This

may allow the airbag to have different rates of inflation

that are based on collision severity and occupant size.

Also, the front passenger airbag is certified to the Federal

regulations that define Occupant Classification (Refer to

Occupant Classification System in this section).

This vehicle may also be equipped with left and right

side curtain airbags to protect the driver and passengers

sitting next to a window. If the vehicle is equipped with

side curtain airbags, they are located above the side

Window Airbag

windows. Their covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG. NOTE: Airbag covers may not be obvious in the

interior trim, but they will open to allow airbag deployment.


WARNING!

• Do not put anything on or around the front airbag

covers or attempt to manually open them. You may

damage the airbags and you could be injured because

the airbags are not there to protect you. These

protective covers for the airbag cushions are designed

to open only when the airbags are inflating.

• If your vehicle is equipped with left and right side

curtain airbags, do not stack luggage or other cargo

up high enough to block the location of the side

curtain airbag. The area where the side curtain airbag

is located should remain free from any obstructions.

• If your vehicle is equipped with left and right side

curtain airbags, do not have any accessory items

installed which will alter the roof, including adding

a sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that

require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for

installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the

roof of the vehicle for any reason.

• Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in

any way.

• Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster

such as alarm lights, stereos, citizens band radios etc.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37

Along with the seat belts, front airbags work with the

instrument panel knee bolsters to provide improved

protection for the driver and front passenger. Side Curtain

Airbags also work with seat belts to improve occupant

protection.

The seat belts are designed to protect you in many types

of collisions. The front airbags deploy in moderate to

severe frontal collisions.

NOTE: The passenger front airbag may not deploy

even when the driver front airbag has if the Occupant

Classification System (refer to Occupant Classification

System in this section) has determined the passenger

seat is empty or is occupied by someone that is classified

in the small child category.

If your vehicle is so equipped, the Side Curtain Airbag on

the crash side of the vehicle is triggered in moderate to

severe side collisions. But even in collisions where the

airbags work, you need the seat belts to keep you in the

right position for the airbags to protect you properly.

Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize

the risk of harm from a deploying airbag.

2


38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

1. Children 12 years old and under should ride buckled

up in the rear seat. Infants in rear-facing child restraints

should NEVER ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a

passenger front airbag. An airbag deployment could

cause severe injury or death to infants in that position.

Children that are not big enough to properly wear the

vehicle seat belt (see section on “Child Restraint”) should

be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or beltpositioning

booster seats.

Older children who do not use child restraints or beltpositioning

booster seats should ride properly buckled

up in the rear seat. Never allow children to slide the

shoulder belt behind them or under their arm.

If a child from 1 to 12 years old must ride in the front

passenger seat because the vehicle is crowded, move the

seat as far back as possible, and use the proper child

restraint. See the section on “Child Restraint”.

2. You should read the instructions provided with your

child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.

3. All occupants should use their seat belts properly.

4. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved

back as far as practical to allow the airbags time to inflate.

5. If your vehicle has left and right side curtain airbags,

do not lean against the door, airbags will inflate forcefully

into the space between you and the door.

6. If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be

modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact the

Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided in the If

You Need Customer Assistance section in this manual.


WARNING!

• Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more

severe injuries in a collision. The airbags work

with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In

some collisions the airbags won’t deploy at all.

Always wear your seat belts even though you

have airbags.

• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument

panel during airbag deployment could cause

serious injury. Airbags need room to inflate. Sit

back, comfortably extending your arms to reach

the steering wheel or instrument panel.

• If the vehicle has left and right side curtain

airbags, they also need room to inflate. Do not

lean against the door or window. Sit upright in the

center of the seat.

Air Bag System Components

The airbag system consists of the following:

• Occupant Restraint Controller

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39

• Airbag Warning Light

• Driver Airbag

• Passenger Airbag

• Side Curtain Airbags above Side Windows (If Equipped)

• Side Remote Acceleration Sensors (If Equipped)

• Steering Wheel and Column

• Instrument Panel

• Interconnecting Wiring

• Knee Impact Bolsters

• Front Acceleration Sensors

• Driver and Front Passenger Seat Belt Pretensioners

• Occupant Classification System (OCS) for the Front

Passenger Seat

− Occupant Classification Module

− Passenger Airbag Disable (PAD) Indicator Light

− Weight Sensors

2


40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

How The Airbag System Works

• The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines

if a frontal collision is severe enough to require the

airbags to inflate. The front airbag inflators are designed

to provide different rates of airbag inflation

from direction provided by the ORC. The ORC may

also modify the rate of inflation based on the occupant

size provided by the Occupant Classification Module.

The ORC will not detect roll over.

• The ORC also monitors the readiness of the electronic

parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in

the START or ON positions. These include all of the

items listed above except the knee bolster, the instrument

panel, and the steering wheel and column. If the

key is in the LOCK position, in the ACC position, or

not in the ignition, the airbags are not on and will not

inflate.

• Also, the ORC turns on the airbag warning

light and PAD indicator light in the instrument

panel for 6 to 8 seconds for a self-check

when the ignition is first turned on. After the

self-check, the airbag warning light will turn off. The

PAD indicator light will function normally (Refer to

Passenger Airbag Disable (PAD) Indicator Light in

this section). If the ORC detects a malfunction in any

part of the system, it turns on the airbag warning light

either momentarily or continuously. A single chime

will sound if the light comes on again after initial start

up.

WARNING!

Ignoring the AIRBAG light in your instrument panel

could mean you won’t have the airbags to protect

you in a collision. If the light does not come on, stays

on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as you

drive, have the airbag system checked right away.

• The Occupant Classification System (OCS) is part of

a Federally regulated safety system required for this

vehicle. It is designed to turn off the front passenger

airbag in the unlikely event that a rear-facing infant

seat is in the front passenger seat.


NOTE: Children 12 years and under should always ride

buckled up in a rear seat in an appropriate child restraint.

• The Passenger Air Bag Disable (PAD) Indicator Light

(an amber light located in the center of the instrument

panel) tells the driver and front passenger when the

front passenger air bag is turned off. The PAD indicator

lamp illuminates the front passenger air bag icon

and the words PASS AIR BAG OFF to show that the

passenger air bag will not inflate during a collision

requiring air bags. When the right front passenger seat

is empty or when very light objects are placed on the

seat, the passenger air bag will not inflate even though

the PAD indicator lamp is not illuminated.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41

Passenger Airbag Disable Light

The PAD indicator light should not be illuminated

when teenagers, most children in a forward-facing

child restraint or booster seats, most children that can

properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt, and when an

adult passenger is properly seated in the front passenger

seat. In this case, the air bag is ready to be inflated

if a collision requiring an air bag occurs.

2


42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

For almost all properly installed rear facing child

restraints, the PAD indicator light will be illuminated

indicating that the front passenger air bag is turned off

and will not inflate. If the PAD indicator light is not

illuminated, DO NOT assume the air bag is turned off

and move the child restraint to the rear seat. A

deploying passenger air bag can cause death or serious

injury to a child in a rear facing infant seat.

NOTE: Even though this vehicle is equipped with an

occupant classification system, children 12 years and under

should always ride buckled up in a rear seat in an appropriate

child restraint (see section on child restraints).

Front Passenger Seat

Occupant

Passenger Airbag

Disable (PAD) Indicator

Light

Airbag

Status

Adult

Grocery Bags, Heavy

OFF ON

Briefcases and Other

Relatively Light Objects

ON OFF

Empty or Very Small

Objects

OFF* OFF

* Since the system senses weight, some small objects

will turn the PAD Indicator Light on.

The OCS classifies an occupant using weight sensors

mounted in the base of the front passenger seat. Any

weight on the seat will be sensed by the system. Objects

hanging on the seat or other passengers pushing down

on the seat will also be sensed. The weight of an adult

will cause the system to turn the airbag on. In this case,

the OCS has classified the occupant of the seat as an

adult. An adult occupant needs to sit in a normal position

(with their feet on or near the floor) in order to be

properly classified. Reclining the seat back too far may

change how an occupant is classified by the OCS.

Drivers and adult passengers should verify that the PAD

Indicator Light is not illuminated when an adult is riding

in the front passenger seat. If an adult occupant’s weight

is transferred to another part of the vehicle (like the door

or instrument panel), the weight sensors in the seat may

not properly classify the occupant. Objects lodged under

the seat or between the seat and the center console can

prevent the occupant’s weight from being measured

properly and may result in the occupant being improperly

classified. Ensure that the front passenger seat back

does not touch anything placed on the back seat because


this can also affect occupant classification. Also, if you

fold down the rear seat check to be sure it doesn’t touch

the front passenger seat.

If the front passenger seat is damaged in any way, it

should only be serviced by an authorized dealer. If the

seat is removed (or even if the seat attachment bolts are

loosened or tightened in any way), take the vehicle to an

authorized dealer.

If there is a fault present in the OCS, the Airbag Warning

Light (a red light located in the center of the instrument

cluster directly in front of the driver) will be turned on.

This indicates that you should take the vehicle to an

authorized dealer. The Airbag Warning Light is turned on

whenever there is fault that can affect the operation of the

airbag system. If there is a fault present in the OCS, both

the PAD Indicator Light and the Airbag Warning Light

are illuminated to show that the passenger airbag is

turned off until the fault is cleared. If an object is lodged

under the seat and interferes with operation of the weight

sensors, a fault will occur which turns on both the PAD

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43

Indicator Light and the Airbag Warning Light. Once the

lodged object is removed, the fault will be automatically

cleared after a short period of time.

• The Driver and Passenger Airbag/Inflator Units are

located in the center of the steering wheel and the right

side of the instrument panel. When the ORC detects a

collision requiring the airbags, it signals the inflator

units. A large quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to

inflate the front airbags. Different airbag inflation rates

may be possible based on collision severity and occupant

size. The steering wheel hub trim cover and the

upper right side of the instrument panel separate and

fold out of the way as the bags inflate to their full size.

The bags fully inflate in about 50 - 70 milliseconds.

This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes.

The bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain

the driver and front passenger. The driver’s front

airbag gas is vented through vent holes in the sides of

the airbag. The passenger’s front airbag gas is vented

through vent holes in the sides of the airbag. In this

way the airbags do not interfere with your control of

the vehicle.

2


44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

• The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is located

beneath the front passenger seat. The OCM

classifies the occupant into categories based on the

measurements made by the seat weight sensors. The

OCM communicates with the Occupant Restraint Controller

(ORC). The ORC uses the occupant category to

determine whether the front passenger airbag should

be turned off. It also determines the rate of airbag

inflation during a collision.

• Your vehicle has four Weight Sensors located between

the seat and the floor pan. The weight sensors measure

applied weight and transfers that information to the

OCM.

• The Side Impact SRS Side Curtain Airbag are designed

to activate only in certain side collisions. When

the ORC (with side impact option) detects a collision

requiring the side curtain airbag to inflate, it signals

the inflators on the crash side of the vehicle. A quantity

of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate the side curtain

airbag. The inflating side curtain airbag pushes the

outside edge of the headliner out of the way and

covers the window. The airbag inflates in about 30

milliseconds (about one quarter of the time it takes to

blink your eyes) with enough force to injure you if you

are not belted and seated properly, or if items are

positioned in the area where the side curtain airbag

inflates. This especially applies to children. The side

curtain airbag is only about 3-1/2 inches (9 cm) thick

when it is inflated.

• The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of

the driver and the front passenger, and position everyone

for the best interaction with the front airbag.

The front passenger seat assembly contains critical components

that affect the front passenger airbag deployment.

Correctly functioning front passenger seat components

are critical for the Occupant Classification System

(OCS) to properly classify the front passenger and calculate

the proper airbag deployment. Do not make any

modifications to the front passenger seat components,

assembly, or to the seat cover.


The following requirements must be strictly adhered to:

• Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or

components in any way.

• Do not modify the front seat center console or center

position seat in any way.

• Do not use prior or future model year seat covers not

designated for the specific model being repaired. Always

use the correct seat cover specified for the

vehicle.

• Do not replace the seat cover with an aftermarket seat

cover.

• Do not add a secondary seat cover other than those

approved by DaimlerChrysler/Mopar.

• At no time should any supplemental restraint system

(SRS) component or SRS related component or fastener

be modified or replaced with any part except

those which are approved by DaimlerChrysler/

Mopar.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45

WARNING!

Unapproved modifications or service procedures to

the front passenger seat assembly, its related components,

or seat cover may inadvertently change the

airbag deployment in case of a frontal crash. This

could result in death or serious injury to the front

seat passenger if the vehicle is involved in an accident.

A modified vehicle may not comply with

required Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards

(FMVSS).

If A Deployment Occurs

The airbag system is designed to deploy when the

Occupant Restraint Controller detects a moderate-tosevere

collision, to help restrain the driver and front

passenger, and then to immediately deflate.

NOTE: A frontal collision that is not severe enough to

need airbag protection will not activate the system. This

does not mean something is wrong with the airbag

system.

2


46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags, any

or all of the following may occur:

• The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abrasions

and/or skin reddening to the driver and front

passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold. The

abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those

you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium

floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.

They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.

However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a

few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor

immediately.

• As the airbags deflate you may see some smoke-like

particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the

process that generates the nontoxic gas used for airbag

inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin,

eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation,

rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat

irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues,

see your doctor. If these particles settle on your

clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions

for cleaning.

• It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the

airbags have been deployed. If you are involved in

another collision, the airbags will not be in place to

protect you.

WARNING!

Deployed airbags can’t protect you in another collision.

Have the airbags replaced by an authorized

dealer as soon as possible.

Enhanced Accident Response Feature

If the airbags deploy after an impact and the electrical

system remains functional, vehicles equipped with

power door locks will unlock automatically. In addition,

approximately 5 seconds after the vehicle has stopped

moving, the interior lights will illuminate to aid visibility.

NOTE: The interior lights can only be deactivated if the

key is removed from the ignition switch or the vehicle is

driven.


Maintaining Your Airbag System

WARNING!

• Modifications to any part of the airbag system could

cause it to fail when you need it. You could be

injured because the airbags are not there to protect

you. Do not modify the components or wiring,

including adding any kind of badges or stickers to

the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right

side of the instrument panel. Do not modify the front

bumper, vehicle body structure, or frame.

• You need proper knee impact protection in a collision.

Do not mount or locate any aftermarket equipment

on or behind the knee impact bolster.

• Do not place or hang any items such as add-on video

players on the right front passenger seat back. The

additional weight may cause the Occupant Classification

System to be unable to correctly classify the

right front occupant. This could allow the passenger

frontal airbag to inflate when it is not desired.

• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the airbag

system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who works on

your vehicle that it has airbags.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47

Airbag Light

You will want to have the airbags ready to

inflate for your protection in an impact. While

the airbag system is designed to be maintenance

free, if any of the following occurs, have

an authorized dealer service the system promptly:

• The airbag light does not come on or flickers during

the 6 to 8 seconds when the ignition switch is first

turned on.

• The light remains on or flickers after the 6 to 8 second

interval.

• The light flickers or comes on and remains on while

driving.

Event Data Recorder (EDR)

In the event of an airbag deployment, your vehicle is

designed to record up to 2-seconds of specific vehicle

data parameters (see list below) in an event data recorder

prior to the moment of airbag deployment. Please note

that such data are ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys,

and are otherwise unavailable. In conjunction with other

data gathered during a complete accident investigation,

2


48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

the electronic data may be used by DaimlerChrysler and

others to learn more about the possible causes of crashes

and associated injuries in order to assess and improve

vehicle performance. In addition to crash investigations

initiated by DaimlerChrysler, such investigations may be

requested by customers, insurance carriers, government

officials, and professional crash researchers, such as those

associated with universities, and with hospital and insurance

organizations.

In the event that an investigation is undertaken by

DaimlerChrysler (regardless of initiative), the company

or its designated representative will first obtain permission

of the appropriate custodial entity for the vehicle

(usually the vehicle owner or lessee) before accessing the

electronic data stored, unless ordered to download data

by a court with legal jurisdiction (i.e., pursuant to a

warrant). A copy of the data will be provided to the

custodial entity upon request. General data that does not

identify particular vehicles or crashes may be released for

incorporation in aggregate crash databases, such as those

maintained by the US government and various states.

Data of a potentially sensitive nature, such as would

identify a particular driver, vehicle, or crash, will be

treated confidentially. Confidential data will not be disclosed

by DaimlerChrysler to any third party except

when:

1. Used for research purposes, such as to match data

with a particular crash record in an aggregate database,

provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter

preserved

2. Used in defense of litigation involving a

DaimlerChrysler product

3. Requested by police under a legal warrant

4. Otherwise required by law

Data Parameters that May Be Recorded:

• Diagnostic trouble code(s) and warning lamp status

for electronically-controlled safety systems, including

the airbag system

• Airbag disable lamp status (if equipped)

• Time of airbag deployment (in terms of ignition

cycles and vehicle mileage)

• Airbag deployment level (if applicable)


• Seatbelt status

• Brake status (service and parking brakes)

• Accelerator status (including vehicle speed)

• Engine control status (including engine speed)

• Cruise control status

• Traction/stability control status

Child Restraint

Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the

time, babies and children, too. Every state in the United

States and all Canadian provinces require that small

children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the law,

and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.

Children 12 years and under should ride properly buckled

up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash

statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in

the rear seats rather than in the front.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49

WARNING!

In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny

baby, can become a missile inside the vehicle. The

force required to hold even an infant on your lap

could become so great that you could not hold the

child, no matter how strong you are. The child and

others could be badly injured. Any child riding in

your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the

child’s size.

There are different sizes and types of restraints for children

from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an

adult safety belt. Always check the child seat Owner’s

Manual to ensure you have the right seat for your child. Use

the restraint that is correct for your child:

Infants and Child Restraints

• Safety experts recommend that children ride

rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are at least

one year old and weigh at least 9 kg (20 lbs). Two types

of child restraints can be used rearward-facing: infant

carriers and “convertible” child seats.

2


50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

• The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the

vehicle. It is recommended for children who weigh up

to about 20 lbs (9 kg). “Convertible” child seats can be

used either rearward-facing or forward-facing in the

vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher

weight limit in the rearward-facing direction than

infant carriers do, so they can be used rearward-facing

by children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) but are

less than one year old. Both types of child restraints are

held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the

LATCH child restraint anchorage system. (See the

LATCH — Child Seat Anchorage System section.)

• Rearward-facing child seats must NEVER be used in

the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger

airbag unless the airbag is turned off. An airbag

deployment could cause severe injury or death to

infants in this position.

WARNING!

• Improper installation can lead to failure of an

infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a

collision. The child could be badly injured or

killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly

when installing an infant or child restraint.

• A rearward facing child restraint should only be

used in a rear seat. A rearward facing child restraint

in the front seat may be struck by a

deploying passenger airbag which may cause severe

or fatal injury to the infant.

Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child

restraint:

• Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it

has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety

Standards. We also recommend that you make sure

that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle

where you will use it before you buy it.


• The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s

weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for

weight and height limits.

• Carefully follow the instructions that come with the

restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may

not work when you need it.

• Buckle the child into the seat according to the child

restraint manufacturer’s directions.

• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the

vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle.

Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or

collision, it could strike the occupants or seat backs

and cause serious personal injury.

NOTE: For additional information refer to

www.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK.

Older Children and Child Restraints

Children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) and who are

older than one year can ride forward-facing in the

vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child

seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children

who weigh 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg) and who are older

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51

than one year. These child seats are also held in the

vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH child

restraint anchorage system. (See the LATCH — Child

Seat Anchorage System Section.)

The belt-positioning booster seat is for children weighing

more than 40 lbs (18 kg), but who are still too small to fit

the vehicle’s seat belts properly. If the child cannot sit

with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while the

child’s back is against the seat back, they should use a

belt-positioning booster seat. The child and beltpositioning

booster seat are held in the vehicle by the

lap/shoulder belt.

Children Too Large For Booster Seats

Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt

comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend

over the front of the seat when their back is against the

seat back, should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.

• Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.

• The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug

as possible.

2


52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

• Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or

slouching can move the belt out of position.

• If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the

child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a

child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind

their back.

LATCH — Child Seat Anchorage System (Lower

Anchors and Tether for CH ildren)

Your vehicle’s rear seat is equipped with the child restraint

anchorage system called LATCH. The LATCH system provides

for the installation of the child restraint without using

the vehicle’s seat belts, instead securing the child restraint

using lower anchorages and upper tether straps from the

child restraint to the vehicle structure.

LATCH-compatible child restraint systems are now available.

However, because the lower anchorages are to be

introduced over a period of years, child restraint systems

having attachments for those anchorages will continue to

also have features for installation using the vehicle’s seat

belts. Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for

connection to the top tether anchorages have been available

for some time. For some older child restraints, many

child restraint manufacturers offer add-on tether strap

kits or retro-fit kits. You are urged to take advantage of all

the available attachments provided with your child restraint

in any vehicle.

All three rear seating positions have lower anchorages

that are capable of accommodating LATCH-compatible

child seats. You should NEVER install LATCHcompatible

child seats such that two seats share a common

lower anchorage.

LATCH Anchorages


Installing the LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint

System

We urge that you carefully follow the directions of the

manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all

child restraint systems will be installed as described here.

Again, carefully follow the installation instructions that

were provided with the child restraint system.

The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars,

located at the rear of the seat cushion where it

meets the seat back. The location of the lower

anchorages are identified by a symbol on the

seat back. You will easily feel them if you run your finger

along the intersection of the seatback and seat cushion

surfaces.

In addition, there are tether strap anchorages

behind each rear seating position located in the

panel between the rear seat back and the rear

window. These tether strap anchorages are

under a plastic cover with this symbol on it.

Many, but not all restraint systems will be equipped with

separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or

connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53

means of adjusting the tension in the strap. Forwardfacing

toddler restraints and some rear-facing infant

restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap, a

hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a

means of adjusting the tension of the strap.

You will first loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and

on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach the

hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages. Next

attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the

seat cover material. Then rotate the tether anchorage

cover directly behind the seat where you are placing the

child restraint and attach the tether strap to the anchorage,

being careful to route the tether strap to provide the

most direct path between the anchor and the child

restraint. If your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear

head restraints, raise the head restraint and, where possible,

route the tether strap under the head restraint and

between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head

restraint and route the tether strap around the outboard

side of the head restraint. Finally, tighten all three straps

as you push the child restraint rearward and downward

into the seat, removing slack in the straps according to

the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.

2


54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

Improper installation of a child restraint to the

LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or

child restraint. The child could be badly injured or

killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly

when installing an infant or child restraint.

Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat

belt

The passenger seat belts are equipped with cinching latch

plates which are designed to keep the lap portion tight

around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use

a locking clip. Pulling up on the shoulder portion of the

lap/shoulder belt will tighten the belt. The cinching latch

plate will keep the belt tight, however, any seat belt

system will loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally

and pull it tight if necessary.

In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the

lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because the

buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening

on the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate from the

buckle and twist the short buckle-end belt several times

to shorten it. Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the

release button facing out.

If the belt still can’t be tightened, or if by pulling and

pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, you may need

to do something more. Disconnect the latch plate from

the buckle, turn the buckle around, and insert the latch

plate into the buckle again. If you still can’t make the

child restraint secure, try a different seating position.


To attach a child restraint tether strap:

1. Rotate the cover over the anchor directly behind the

seat where you are placing the child restraint.

Tether Strap Mounting

2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path

for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If

your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head

restraints, raise the head restraint and, where possible,

route the tether strap under the head restraint and

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55

between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head

restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard

side of the head restraint.

3. Attach the tether strap hook (A) of the child restraint to

the anchor (B) and remove slack in the tether strap

according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.

WARNING!

An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to

increased head motion and possible injury to the

child. Use only the anchor positions directly behind

the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether

strap.

Transporting Pets

Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.

An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly

injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in

a collision.

2


56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses

or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.

ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS

A long break-in period is not required for the engine in

your new vehicle.

Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).

After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55

mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.

While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration, within the

limits of local traffic laws, contributes to a good break-in.

Wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be

detrimental and should be avoided.

The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a

high quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil

changes should be consistent with anticipated climate

conditions under which vehicle operations will occur.

The recommended viscosity and quality grades are

shown in Section 7 of this manual. NON-DETERGENT

OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE

USED.

A new engine may consume some oil during its first few

thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be

considered as a normal part of the break-in and not

interpreted as an indication of difficulty.

SAFETY TIPS

Exhaust Gas

WARNING!

Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon

monoxide (CO) which is colorless and odorless.

Breathing it can make you unconscious and can

eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO)

follow the safety tips below.

Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined

areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or

out of the area.

If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine

running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force

outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.


WARNING!

If you are required to drive with the trunk open,

make sure that all windows are closed, and the

climate control blower switch is set at high speed.

DO NOT use the recirculation mode.

Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The

Vehicle

Seat Belts

Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,

frays and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced

immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.

Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a

collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after

a collision if they have been damaged (bent retractor, torn

webbing, etc. If there is any question regarding belt or

retractor condition, replace the belt.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57

Airbag Light

The light should come on and remain on for 6 to 8

seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first

turned ON. If the LED is not lit during starting, have it

checked. If the light stays on or comes on while driving,

have the system checked by an authorized dealer.

Defroster

Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place

the blower control on high speed. You should be able to

feel the air directed against the windshield.

Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside

The Vehicle

Tires

Examine tires for excessive tread wear or uneven wear

patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects

lodged in the tread. Inspect tread and sidewall for cuts or

cracks. Check wheel nuts for tightness, and tires (including

spare) for proper pressure.

2


58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Lights

Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights

while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high

beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.

Fluid Leaks

Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,

engine coolant, oil or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline

fumes are detected or fuel, power steering fluid or brake

fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be located and

corrected immediately.


UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

CONTENTS

Mirrors ..............................63

▫ Automatic Dimming Inside Mirror ..........63

▫ Driver’s Side Outside Mirror Auto Dimmer ....63

▫ Tilt In Reverse Feature ...................63

▫ Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature ...........64

▫ Outside Mirror — Driver’s Side ............64

▫ Outside Mirror — Passenger’s Side ..........64

▫ Power Remote-Control Mirrors .............64

▫ Heated Remote Control Mirrors ............65

▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors ................65

Hands–Free Communication (UConnect) —

If Equipped ...........................66

▫ Operation ............................67

▫ Phone Call Features ....................72

▫ UConnect System Features ..............75

▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity .............78

▫ Things You Should Know About Your

UConnect System .....................80

Rear Park Assist System ..................85

Seats ................................87

▫ Power Seats ..........................87

▫ Power Reclining Seats ...................88

▫ Lumbar Support .......................88

▫ Heated Seats .........................88

3


60 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

▫ Memory Feature .......................89

▫ Programming The Remote Keyless Transmitter

For The Memory Feature .................91

▫ Driver’s Seat Glide To Exit Feature ..........91

▫ Head Restraints .......................92

▫ Folding Rear Seat ......................93

Adjustable Pedals .......................94

To Open And Close The Hood .............95

Lights ...............................97

▫ Overhead Console Map/Reading Lights ......97

▫ Interior Lights ........................97

▫ Headlight Switch ......................98

▫ Multi-Function Lever ....................99

▫ Headlights, Parking Lights, Instrument Panel

Lights ..............................99

▫ Automatic Headlights ..................100

▫ Headlamps On With Wipers .............100

▫ Daytime Running Lights (Canada Only) .....100

▫ Lights-On Reminder ...................100

▫ Headlight Time Delay ..................100

▫ Fog Lights ..........................101

▫ Turn Signals .........................101

▫ Highbeam/Lowbeam Select Switch .........101

▫ Flash To Pass ........................101

Windshield Wipers And Washers ..........102

▫ Windshield Washers ...................102

▫ Rain Sensing Wipers ...................103

▫ Mist Feature .........................103

▫ Headlamps On With Wipers .............104

▫ Windshield Wiper Operation .............104

▫ Intermittent Wiper System ...............104

▫ Adding Washer Fluid ..................104


Headlight Washers .....................105

▫ Adding Washer Fluid ..................106

Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column .....106

Traction Control System (TCS) ............107

Brake Assist System (BAS) ...............108

Electronic Stability Program (ESP) ..........109

▫ Synchronizing ESP ....................111

Electronic Speed Control .................111

▫ To Activate ..........................112

▫ To Set At A Desired Speed ...............112

▫ To Deactivate ........................112

▫ To Resume Speed .....................112

▫ To Vary The Speed Setting ...............112

▫ To Accelerate For Passing ...............113

Overhead Console .....................114

▫ Courtesy/Reading Lights ................114

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 61

▫ Sunglasses Storage ....................114

Garage Door Opener ...................115

▫ Programming Homelink ................115

▫ Canadian Programming/Gate Programming . . 118

▫ Using Homelink ......................119

▫ Erasing Homelink Buttons ...............119

▫ Reprogramming a Single Homelink Button . . . 119

▫ Security ............................119

Power Sunroof — If Equipped ............120

▫ Opening Sunroof - Express ..............121

▫ Closing Sunroof - Express ...............121

▫ Pinch Protect Feature ...................121

▫ Pinch Protect Override .................122

▫ Venting Sunroof - Express ...............122

▫ Sunshade Operation ...................122

▫ Wind Buffeting .......................122

3


62 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

▫ Sunroof Maintenance ...................122

▫ Ignition Off Operation ..................122

▫ Sunroof Fully Closed ...................123

Electrical Power Outlets .................123

▫ Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off .......124

Cupholders ..........................125

▫ Front Seat Cupholders ..................125

▫ Rear Seat Cupholders ..................125

Storage ..............................126

▫ Console Features ......................126

▫ Cargo Tie-Down Hooks .................126


MIRRORS

Automatic Dimming Inside Mirror

When the switch is placed in the “AUTO” position the

mirror will automatically adjust for annoying headlight

glare from vehicles behind you. The mirror will normally

be in the “AUTO” mode unless “OFF” is pressed on the

switch at the base of the mirror. A green light in the base

of the mirror will illuminate to indicate when this feature

is on.

Automatic Dimming Mirror

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 63

CAUTION!

To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning,

never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the

mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and

wipe the mirror clean.

Driver’s Side Outside Mirror Auto Dimmer

The driver’s side outside mirror automatically adjusts for

annoying headlight glare from vehicles behind you. This

feature can be turned on or off by pressing the button at

the base of the Inside Rearview Mirror.

Tilt in Reverse Feature

The Tilt in Reverse feature tilts the outside rearview

mirrors down when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE

with the ignition switch in the RUN position. This feature

provides the customer with a better view of the ground

and vehicle in the area of the rear tires when backing up.

The mirrors move back to their previous position when

the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. This feature is

disabled from the factory, but can be enabled by the

3


64 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

electronic vehicle information center (EVIC). Refer to

Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) in this

manual for details.

Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature

Some models have exterior mirrors that are hinged and

may move either forward or rearward to resist damage.

The hinges have three detent positions; full forward, full

rearward, and normal.

Outside Mirror — Driver’s Side

Adjust the outside mirror to center on the adjacent lane of

traffic, with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the

inside mirror.

Outside Mirror — Passenger’s Side

Adjust the convex outside mirror so you can just see the

side of your vehicle in the portion of the mirror closest to

the vehicle. This type of mirror will give a much wider

view to the rear, and especially of the lane next to your

vehicle.

WARNING!

Vehicles and other objects seen in the right side

convex mirror will look smaller and farther away

than they really are. Relying too much on your right

side mirror could cause you to collide with another

vehicle or other object.

Use your inside mirror when judging the size or

distance of a vehicle seen in this convex mirror.

Power Remote-Control Mirrors

The power mirror switch is located on the driver’s door

trim panel next to the power door lock switch. A rotary

knob selects the left mirror, right mirror, or off position.

After selecting a mirror move the knob in the same

direction you want the mirror to move. Use the center off

position to guard against accidentally moving a mirror

position.


Power Mirror Controls

Power mirror preselected positions can be controlled by

the Memory Feature. Refer to the “Seats” section for

details.

Heated Remote Control Mirrors

These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This feature

is activated whenever you turn on the Rear Window

Defrost.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 65

Illuminated Vanity Mirrors

An illuminated vanity mirror is on the sun visor. To use

the mirror, rotate the sun visor down and swing the

mirror cover upward. The light turns on automatically.

Closing the mirror cover turns off the lights.

Illuminated Vanity Mirror

3


66 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

HANDS–FREE COMMUNICATION (UConnect) —

IF EQUIPPED

UConnect is a voice-activated, hands-free, in vehicle

communications system. UConnect allows you to dial

a phone number with your cellular phone* using simple

voice commands (e.g., Call Mike Work or Dial

248-555-1212). Your cellular phone’s audio is transmitted

through your vehicle’s audio system; the system will

automatically mute your radio when using the UConnect

system.

NOTE: The UConnect system use requires a cellular

phone equipped with the Bluetooth Hands-Free Profile,

version 0.96 or higher.

For UConnect Customer Support call 1-877-855-8400

or visit the UConnect website (www.chrysler.com/

uconnect).

UConnect allows you to transfer calls between the

system and your cellular phone as you enter or exit your

vehicle, and enables you to mute the system’s microphone

for private conversation.

The UConnect phonebook enables you to store up to 32

names and four numbers per name. Each language has a

separate 32 name phonebook accessible only in that

language. This system is driven through your Bluetooth

Hands-Free profile cellular phone. UConnect

features Bluetooth technology - the global standard

that enables different electronic devices to connect to

each other without wires or a docking station, so UConnect

works no matter where you stow your cellular

phone (be it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as long as

your phone is turned on and has been paired to the

vehicle’s UConnect system. The UConnect system

allows up to seven cellular phones to be linked to system.

Only one linked (or paired) cellular phone can be used

with the system at a time. The system is available in

English, Spanish, or French languages (as equipped).

The rearview mirror contains the microphone for the

system and the control buttons that will enable you to

access the system. The diagram below shows the mirror

with the appropriate buttons. Individual button behavior

is discussed in the Operation section.


UConnect Switches

The UConnect system can be used with any Hands-

Free Profile certified Bluetooth cellular phone. If your

cellular phone supports a different profile (eg., Headset

Profile), you may not be able to use any UConnect

features. Refer to your cellular service provider or the

phone manufacturer for details.

The UConnect system is fully integrated with the

vehicle’s audio system. The volume of the UConnect

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 67

system can either be adjusted from the radio volume

control knob, or from the steering wheel radio control

(right switch), if so equipped.

The radio display will be used for visual prompts from

the UConnect system such as CELL or caller ID on

certain radios.

Operation

Voice commands can be used to operate the UConnect

system and to navigate through the UConnect menu

structure. Voice commands are required after most

UConnect system prompts. You will be prompted for a

specific command and then guided through the available

options.

• Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for

the voice on beep, which follows the Ready prompt

or another prompt.

• For certain operations, compound commands can be

used. For example, instead of saying Setup and then

Phone Pairing, the following compound command

can be said: Setup Phone Pairing.

3


68 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• For each of the feature explanation in this section, only

the combined form of the voice command is given.

You can also break the commands into parts and say

each part of the command, when you are asked for it.

For example, you can either use the combined form

voice command Phonebook New Entry, or you can

break the combined form command into two voice

commands: Phonebook and New Entry. Please remember,

the UConnect system works best when you

talk in a normal conversational tone, as if speaking to

some one sitting eight feet away from you.

Voice Command Tree

Refer to “Voice Tree” at the end of this section.

Help Command

If you need assistance at any prompt or if you want to

know what your options are at any prompt, say Help

following the voice on beep. The UConnect system will

play all the options at any prompt if you ask for help.

To activate the UConnect system from idle, simply

press the ’Phone’ button and follow audible prompts for

directions. All UConnect system sessions begin with a

press of the ’Phone’ button on the mirror.

Cancel Command

At any prompt, after the voice on beep, you can say

Cancel and you will be returned to the main menu.

However, in a few instances the system will take you

back to the previous menu.

Pair (Link) UConnect System to a Cellular Phone

To begin using your UConnect system, you must pair

your compatible Bluetooth enabled cellular phone (refer

to Introduction section to learn about the phone

type). To complete the pairing process, you will need to

reference your cellular phone owner’s manual. One of the

following vehicle specific websites may also provide

detailed instructions for pairing with the brand of phone

that you have:

NOTE: www.chrysler.com/uconnect or

www.dodge.com/uconnect or www.jeep.com/uconnect

The following are general phone to UConnect System

pairing instructions:

• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.

• After the Ready prompt and the following beep, say

Setup Phone Pairing.


• When prompted, after the voice on beep, say Pair a

Phone.

• You will be asked to say a four-digit pin number which

you will later need to enter into your cellular. You can

enter any four-digit pin number. You will not need to

remember this pin number after the initial pairing

process.

• The UConnect system will then prompt you to begin

the cellular phone pairing process on your cellular

phone. Before attempting to pair phone, please see

your cellular phone’s user manual (Bluetooth section)

for instructions on how to complete this step.

• For identification purposes, you will be prompted to

give the UConnect system a name for your cellular

phone. Each cellular phone that is paired should be

given a unique phone name.

• You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a

priority level between 1 and 7, 1 being the highest

priority. You can pair up to seven cellular phones to

your UConnect system. However, at any given time,

only one cellular phone can be in use, connected to

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 69

your UConnect System. The priority allows the

UConnect system to know which cellular phone to

use if multiple cellular phones are in the vehicle at the

same time. For example, if priority 3 and priority 5

phones are present in the vehicle, the UConnect

system will use the priority 3 cellular phone when you

make a call. You can select to use a lower priority

cellular phone at any time (refer to Advanced Phone

Connectivity section).

Dial by Saying a Number

• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.

• After the Ready prompt and the following beep, say

Dial.

• System will prompt you to say the number you want

call.

• For example, you can say 234-567-8901. The phone

number that you enter must be of valid length and

combination. The UConnect limits the user from

dialing invalid combination of numbers. For example,

3


70 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

234-567-890 is nine digits long, which is not a valid

phone number - the closest valid phone number has

ten digits.

• The UConnect system will confirm the phone number

and then dial. The number will appear in the

display of certain radios.

Call by Saying a Name

• Press the “Phone” button to begin.

• After the Ready prompt and the following beep, say

Call.

• System will prompt you to say the name of the person

you want call.

• After the Ready prompt and the following beep, say

the name of the person you want to call. For example,

you can say John Doe, where John Doe is a previously

stored name entry in the UConnect phonebook.

Refer to section Add Names to Your UConnect

Phonebook, to learn how to store a name in the

phonebook.

• The UConnect system will confirm the name and

then dial the corresponding phone number, which

may appear in the display of certain radios.

Add Names to Your UConnect Phonebook

NOTE: Adding names to phonebook is recommended

when vehicle is not in motion.

• Press the “Phone” button to begin.

• After the Ready prompt and the following beep, say

Phonebook New Entry.

• When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of

long names helps the voice recognition and is recommended.

For example, say Robert Smith or Robert

instead of Bob.

• When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g.:

Home, Work, Mobile, or Pager). This will allow

you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook

entry, if desired.

• When prompted, recite the phone number for the

phonebook entry that you are adding.


After you are finished adding an entry into the phonebook,

you will be given the opportunity to add more

phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the

main menu.

The UConnect system will allow you to enter up to 32

names in the phonebook with each name having up to

four associated phone numbers and designations. Each

language has a separate 32 name phonebook accessible

only in that language.

Edit Entries in the UConnect Phonebook

NOTE: Adding names to phonebook is recommended

when vehicle is not in motion.

• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.

• After the Ready prompt and the following beep, say

Phonebook Edit.

• You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook

entry that you wish to edit.

• Next, choose the number designation (home, work,

mobile, or pager) that you wish to edit.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 71

• When prompted, recite the new phone number for the

phonebook entry that you are editing.

After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook,

you will be given the opportunities to edit another entry

in the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or

return to the main menu.

Phonebook Edit can be used to add another phone

number to a name entry that already exists in the

phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a

mobile and a home number, but you can add John Doe’s

work number later using the Phonebook Edit feature.

Delete Entries in the UConnect Phonebook

• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.

• After the Ready prompt and the following beep, say

Phonebook Delete.

• After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will

then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish

to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook

entry that you wish to delete or you can say List

Names to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook

3


72 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

from which you choose. To select one of the entries

from the list, press the Voice Recognition button

while the UConnect system is playing the desired

entry and say Delete.

• After you enter the name, the UConnect system will

ask you which designation you wish to delete: home,

work, mobile or pager. Say the designation you wish

to delete.

After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be deleted.

Note that only the phonebook in the current

language is deleted.

Delete All Entries in the UConnect Phonebook

• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.

• After the Ready prompt and the following beep, say

Phonebook Erase All.

• The UConnect system will ask you to verify that you

wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.

• After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be

deleted.

List All Names in the UConnect Phonebook

• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.

• After the Ready prompt and the following beep, say

Phonebook List Names.

• The UConnect system will play the names of all the

phonebook entries.

• To call one of the names in the list, press the Voice

Recognition’ button during the playing of the desired

name and say Call. NOTE: the user can also exercise

Edit or Delete operations at this point.

• The UConnect system will then prompt you as to

number designation you wish to call.

• The selected number will be dialed.

Phone Call Features

The following features can be accessed through the

UConnect system if the feature(s) are available on your

cellular service plan. For example, if your cellular service

plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be


accessed through the UConnect system. Check with

your cellular service provider for the features that you

have.

Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - No Call

Currently in Progress

When you receive a call on your cellular phone, the

UConnect system will interrupt the vehicle audio

system, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the

call. To reject the call, press and hold the ’Phone’ button

until you hear a single beep indicating that the incoming

call was rejected.

Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - Call

Currently in Progress

If a call is currently in progress and you have another

incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for

call waiting that you normally hear when using your cell

phone. Press the ’Phone’ button to place the current call

on hold and answer the incoming call. NOTE: The

UConnect system compatible phones in market today

do not support rejecting an incoming call when another

call is in progress. Therefore, the user can only either

answer an incoming call or ignore it.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 73

Making a Second Call while Current Call in

Progress

To make a second call while you are currently in a call,

press the ’Voice Recognition’ button and say Dial or

Call followed by the phone number or phonebook entry

you wish to call. The first call will be on hold while the

second call is in progress. To go back to the first call, refer

to section Toggling Between Two Calls. To combine two

calls, refer to section Conference Call.

Place/Retrieve a Call from Hold

To put a call on hold, press the Phone’ button until you

hear a single beep which will indicate that the call has

been placed on hold. To bring the call back from hold,

press and hold the Phone’ button until you hear a single

beep.

Toggling Between Calls

If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),

press the ’Phone’ button until you hear a single beep

indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls

have switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at one

time.

3


74 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Conference Call

When two calls are in progress (one active and one on

hold), press and hold the ’Phone’ button until you hear a

double beep indicating that the two calls have been

joined into one conference call.

Three-Way Calling

To initiate three-way calling, press the ’Voice Recognition’

button while a call is in progress and make a second

phone call as described in section Making a Second Call

while Current Call in Progress. After the second call has

established, press and hold the ’Phone’ button until you

hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have

been joined into one conference call.

Call Termination

To end a call in progress, momentarily press the Phone’

button. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if

there is a call on hold, it will become the new active call.

Redial

• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.

• After the Ready prompt and the following beep, say

Redial.

• The UConnect system will call the last number that

was dialed on your cellular phone. Note: this may not

be the last number dialed from the UConnect system.

Call Continuation

Call continuation is progression of a phone call on

UConnect system after the vehicle ignition key has

been switched to off. Call continuation functionality

available on the vehicle can be any one of three types:

• After ignition key is switched off, a call can continue

on the UConnect system either until the call ends or

until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of

the call on the UConnect system and transfer of the

call to the mobile phone.

• After ignition key is switched to off, a call can continue

on the UConnect system for certain duration, after

which the call is automatically transferred from the

UConnect system to the mobile phone.

• An active call is automatically transferred to the

mobile phone after ignition key is switched to off.


UConnect System Features

Language Selection

To change the language that the UConnect system is

using,

• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.

• After the Ready prompt and the following beep, say

the name of the language you wish to switch to

(English, Espanol, or Francais, if so equipped).

• Continue to follow the system prompts to complete

language selection.

After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and

voice commands will be in that language.

NOTE: After every UConnect language change operation,

only the language specific 32 name phonebook is

usable. The phone pairing is not language specific and

usable across all languages.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 75

Emergency Assistance

If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is

reachable:

• Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency

number for your area.

If the phone is not reachable and the UConnect system

is operational, you may reach the emergency number as

follows:

• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.

• After the Ready prompt and the following beep, say

Emergency and the UConnect system will instruct

the paired cellular phone to call the emergency number.

This feature is only supported in the USA.

NOTE: The emergency number dialed is based on the

Country where the vehicle is purchased (911 for USA/

Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number called may not

be applicable with the available cellular service and area.

3


76 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

The UConnect system does slightly lower your

chances of successfully making a phone call as to that

for the cell phone directly.

Your phone must be turned on and paired to the

UConnect system to allow use of this vehicle feature

in emergency situations when the cell phone has

network coverage and stays paired to the UConnect

system.

Towing Assistance

If you need towing assistance,

• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.

• After the Ready prompt and the following beep, say

Towing Assistance.

NOTE: The Towing Assistance number dialed is based

on the Country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800-

528-2069 for USA, 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-14-3454

for Mexico city and 1-800-712-3040 for outside Mexico

city in Mexico).

Please refer to the 24-Hour Towing Assistance coverage

details in the DaimlerChrysler Corporation 24-Hour

Towing Assistance Program Guide.

Paging

To learn how to page, refer to section Working with

Automated Systems. Paging works properly except for

pagers of certain companies which time-out a little too

soon to work properly with the UConnect system.

Voice Mail Calling

To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to section

Working with Automated Systems.

Working with Automated Systems

This method is designed to be used in instances where

one generally has to press numbers on the cellular phone

keypad while navigating through an automated telephony

system.

You can use your UConnect system to access a voicemail

system or an automated service, such as, paging

service or automated customer service. Some services

require immediate response selection, in some instances,

that may be too quick for use of UConnect system.


When calling a number with your UConnect system

that normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone

sequence on your cellular phone keypad, you can push

the ’Voice Recognition’ button and say the sequence you

wish to enter followed by the word Send. For example,

if required to enter your pin number followed with a

pound 3746#,youcanpressthe’Voice Recognition’

button and say 3 746#Send. Saying a number, or

sequence of numbers, followed by Send is also to be

used to navigate through an automated customer service

center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager.

Barge In - Overriding Prompts

The ’Voice Recognition’ button can be used when you

wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice

recognition command immediately. For example, if a

prompt is playing Would you like to pair a phone, clear

a, you could press the ’Voice Recognition’ button and

say Pair a Phone to select that option without having to

listen to the rest of the voice prompt.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 77

Turning Confirmation Prompts On/Off

Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system

from confirming your choices (e.g. the UConnect system

will not repeat a phone number before you dial it).

• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.

• After the Ready prompt and the following beep, say

Setup Confirmations. The UConnect system will

play the current confirmation prompt status and you

will be given the choice to change it.

Phone and Network Status Indicators

The UConnect system will provide notification to

inform you if your cellular phone is in roaming status,

has low signal strength, or has a low battery when you

are trying to place a phone call.

Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad

You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone

keypad and still use the UConnect system (while

dialing via the cell phone keypad, the user must exercise

caution and take precautionary safety measures). By

dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth cellular

phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s

3


78 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

audio system. The UConnect system will work the

same as if you dial the number using voice recognition.

NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send

the dial ring to the UConnect system to play it on the

vehicle audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this

situation, after successfully dialing a number, the user

may feel that the call did not go through even though the

call is in progress. Once your call is answered, you will

hear the audio.

Mute/Un-mute (Mute off)

When you mute the UConnect system, you will still be

able to hear the conversation coming from the other

party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In

order to mute the UConnect system:

• Press the ’Voice Recognition’ button.

• After the Ready prompt and the following beep, say

Mute.

In order to un-mute the UConnect system:

• Press the ’Voice Recognition’ button.

• After the Ready prompt and the following beep, say

Mute-off.

Information Service

When using AT&T Wireless Service, dialing to phone

number #121, you can access voice activated automated

system to receive news, weather, stocks, traffic, etc.

related information.

Advanced Phone Connectivity

Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone

The UConnect system allows on going calls to be

transferred to your cellular phone to the UConnect

system without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing

call from your UConnect paired cellular phone to

the UConnect system or vice-versa, press the ’Voice

Recognition’ button and say Transfer Call.

Connect or Disconnect Link Between the

UConnect System and Cellular Phone

Your cellular phone can be paired with many different

electronic devices, but can only be actively connected

with one electronic device at a time.


If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth

connection between a UConnect paired cellular

phone and the UConnect system, follow the instruction

described in your cellular phone user’s manual.

List Paired Cellular Phone Names

• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.

• • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep,

say “Setup Phone pairing”.

• When prompted, say List Phones.

• The UConnect system will play the phone names of

all paired cellular phones in order from the highest to

the lowest priority. To “select” or “delete” a paired

phone being announced, press the Voice recognition’

button and say “Select” or “Delete”. Also, see next two

sections for alternate way of doing this.

Select another Cellular Phone

This feature allows you to select and start using another

phone with the UConnect system. The phone must

have been previously paired to the UConnect system

that you want to use it with.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 79

• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.

• After the Ready prompt and the following beep, say

Setup Select Phone.

• The phone names (along with priority numbers) will

be played.

• When prompted say the priority number of the cellular

phone you wish to select. You can also press the

Voice Recognition’ button anytime while the list is

being played and say the priority number.

• The selected phone will be used for the next phone

call. If the selected phone is not available, the UConnect

system will return to using the highest priority

phone present in or near (approximately with in 30

feet) the vehicle.

Delete UConnect Paired Cellular Phones

• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.

• After the Ready prompt and the following beep, say

Setup Phone Pairing.

• At the next prompt, say Delete.

3


80 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• The phone names (along with priority numbers) will

be played.

• When prompted say the priority number of the cellular

phone (or “All” to delete all phones) you wish to

delete. You can also press the Voice Recognition’

button anytime while the list is being played and say

the priority number.

Things You Should Know About Your UConnect

System

Voice Recognition (VR)

• Always wait for the beep before speaking.

• Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would

speak to a person sitting approximately eight (8) feet

away from you.

• Make sure that no one other than you is speaking

during a voice recognition period.

• Performance is maximized under:

• low-to-medium blower setting,

• low-to-medium vehicle speed,

• low road noise,

• smooth road surface,

• fully closed windows,

• dry weather condition.

• Even though the system is designed for users speaking

in North American English and Spanish accents, the

system may not always work for some.

• When navigating through an automated system, such

as, voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of

speaking the digit string, make sure to say send.

• Storing names in phonebook when vehicle is not in

motion is recommended.

• It is not recommended to store similar sounding

names in the UConnect phonebook.

• UConnect phonebook name tag recognition rate is

optimized for the person who stored the name in the

phonebook.

• You can say O (letter O) for 0 (zero). 800 must be

spoken eight-zero-zero.


• Even though international dialing for most number

combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing

number combinations may not be supported.

Far End Audio Performance

• Audio quality is maximized under:

• low-to-medium blower setting,

• low-to-medium vehicle speed,

• low road noise,

• smooth road surface,

• fully closed windows, and

• dry weather condition.

• Operation from driver seat.

• Performance, such as, audio clarity, echo. and loudness

to a large degree, rely on the phone and network,

and not the UConnect system.

• Echo at far end can sometime be reduced by lowering

the in-vehicle audio volume.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 81

Bluetooth Communication Link

Cellular phones have been found to occasionally loose

connection to the UConnect system. When this happens,

the connection can generally be re-established by

switching the phone off/on. Your cell phone is recommended

to remain in Bluetooth on mode.

Reset

In rare instances, it may be necessary to reset the UConnect

system. The reset feature is exercised by pressing

and holding the ’UConnect ’ and ’Voice Recognition’

buttons simultaneously for 15 seconds. Normally, you do

not need to exercise this feature.

Power-Up

After switching ignition key from off to either On or ACC

position, or after a reset, you must wait at least five (5)

seconds prior to using the system.

3


82 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE


UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 83

3


84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE


North American English

Primary Alternate(s)

Zero Oh

Add location Add new

All All of them

Confirmation prompts Confirmations prompts

Delete a name Delete

Language Select language

List names List all

List paired phones List phones

Pager Beeper

Phone pairing Pairing

Phonebook Phone book

Return to main menu Return. Main menu

Select phone select

Set up Phone settings phone set

up

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85

REAR PARK ASSIST SYSTEM

This system is used to help drivers determine if an obstacle

is in the way of the vehicle while it is backing up in

addition to the use of inside rearview and outside mirrors.

When the driver selects Reverse the system scans for

objects behind the vehicle using four sensors located in

the rear bumper. Objects can be detected from up to 71

inches (180 cm). A warning display above the rear

window provides both visible and audible warnings

indicating the range of the object.

Rear Park Assist Indicator

3


86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

Drivers must be careful when backing up even when

using the Rear Park Assist System. Always check

carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and

be sure to check for pedestrians, other vehicles,

obstructions, and blind spots before backing up.

Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury

or death.

The display contains two sets of yellow and red LEDs

that can be viewed from the driver seat using the rear

view mirror. Each side of the vehicle has its own warning

LEDs. The system provides a visual warning by illuminating

one or more yellow LEDs as the vehicle gets closer

to the object. As the vehicle continues to approaches the

object, one red LED is illuminated and the system emits

a series of short beeps. The tone will remain constant and

both red LEDs are illuminated once the vehicle is within

12 inches (30.5 cm) of the object.

NOTE: The Rear Park Assist System displays the outer

most yellow LED’s at a slightly dimmer level to indicate

that the system is ON.

NOTE: When an audio tone is indicated by the Rear

Park Assist display the system will MUTE the radio if it

is turned on.

The system can be turned on or off through the Electronic

Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) when the vehicle is in

PARK. Refer to “Personal Settings” in the Electronic

Vehicle Information Center section of this manual for

details.

NOTE:

• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of dirt and debris

to keep the system operating properly.

• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could

affect the performance of the system.

If “Service Park Assist System” appears in the EVIC after

making sure the rear bumper is clean please see your

authorized dealer.


SEATS

Power Seats

The power seat switch is on the outboard side of the seat

near the floor. Use this switch to move the driver’s seat

up or down, forward or rearward, or to tilt the seat. The

passenger’s seat operates in a similar manner.

Power Seat Switch

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87

WARNING!

Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is

dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could

cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be

properly adjusted and you could be injured. Adjust

the seat only while the vehicle is parked.

CAUTION!

Do not place any article under a power seat as it may

cause damage to the seat controls.

3


88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Power Reclining Seats

The recliner control is on the outboard side of the seat.

Power Seat Recline Switch

WARNING!

Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the

shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.

In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and

be seriously or even fatally injured. Use the recliner

only when the vehicle is parked.

Lumbar Support

This feature allows you to increase or decrease the

amount of lumbar support. Turn the control lever forward

to increase and rearward to decrease the desired

amount of lumbar support.

Lumbar Support Control Lever

Heated Seats

Heated seats provide comfort and warmth on cold days

and can help soothe sore muscles and backs. The heaters

provide the same heat level for both cushion and back.

The front driver’s and passenger seats are heated. The


controls for each heater are located near the bottom

center of the instrument panel. After turning on the

ignition, you can choose from High, Off, or Low heat

settings. Amber LEDs in the top portion of each switch

indicate the level of heat in use. Two LEDs are illuminated

for high, one for low, and none for off. Pressing the

switch once will select high-level heating.

Heated Seat Switch

Pressing the switch a second time will select low-level

heating. Pressing the switch a third time will shut the

heating elements off.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89

When high-temperature heating is selected, the heaters

provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes

of operation after heating is activated. The heat output

then drops to the normal high-temperature level. If

high-level heating is selected, the system will automatically

switch to the low level after two hours of continuous

operation. At that time, the number of illuminated

LEDs changes from two to one, indicating the change.

Operation on the low setting also turns off automatically

after two hours.

NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt

within two to five minutes.

Memory Feature

This feature allows the driver to store up to two memory

profiles. Each memory profile will include the seat, side

mirror, adjustable pedal, power tilt and telescopic steering

column settings as well as radio station presets.

3


90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

The memory feature switch is located on the driver’s

door panel. The memory switch allows the driver to

recall one of two pre-programmed memory profiles.

Memory Switch

To Set The Memory Feature:

1. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired preferences.

i.e. seat, side mirror, adjustable pedal, power tilt

and telescopic steering column settings as well as the

radio presets.

2. Press and release the Set (S) button on the memory

seat switch, then press button 1 within 5 seconds. The

radio display will show which memory position is being

set.

3. A second memory profile can also be stored in the

vehicle memory. Begin by pressing 2 on the memory

switch for the second driver. Adjust settings to desired

positions, press Set (S) button, then press button 2 within

5 seconds.

Each time the Set and a numbered button are pressed, the

old memory is erased, and a new one is stored.

NOTE: Memory positions can be set without the vehicle

in Park, but the vehicle must be in Park to recall a

memory position. The Recall Memory with Remote Key

Unlock feature must be turned on using the Electronic

Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to Electronic

Vehicle Information Center in this manual for details.


Programming the Remote Keyless Transmitter for

the Memory Feature

Your Remote Keyless Entry Transmitters can be programmed

to return the driver’s seat, side mirror, adjustable

pedal, power tilt and telescopic steering column (if

equipped) settings, and radio station presets to the saved

position when the UNLOCK button is pressed and

released.

To program your transmitters, perform the following:

1. Remove key from ignition with all four doors closed.

2. Select desired memory profile 1 or 2.

3. Press and release the Set (S) button on the memory

seat switch, then press and release button 1 or 2.

Memory Profile Set” (1or 2) will be displayed in the

instrument cluster on vehicles equipped with the Electronic

Vehicle Information Center.

4. Press and release the Lock button on the transmitter

within 10 seconds.

NOTE: Your transmitters may be unlinked to your

memory settings by pressing the Unlock button on the

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91

transmitter in step 4 above. These functions can be

selected at the EVIC using the Personal Settings (Customer

Programmable Features). Refer to Electronic Vehicle

Information Center — “Personal Settings” for details.

When newly purchased (or replacement)

transmitters are programmed into the vehicle, the first

transmitter trained will be associated with memory setting

1, and the second transmitter trained will be associated

with memory setting 2. Additional transmitters will

not be associated with a memory setting.

Driver’s Seat Glide To Exit Feature

This feature provides ease of entry and exit for the driver

by moving the driver’s seat approximately 2–1/8 inches

(55mm) rearward on exit and the same distance forward

after entry, provided that the seat is not in the full

rearward position.

After entry, the seat will return to its previously set

position after one of the following occurs:

• The ignition switch is turned on

• The seatbelt is fastened (the seat moves when the seat

belt buckle is buckled.)

3


92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

This feature can be turned off by performing the following

procedure:

1. Press and hold the Set (S) button on the memory seat

switch (located on the driver’s door panel).

2. Move the horizontal seat switch rearward.

3. Release the Set (S) button and the horizontal seat switch.

During exit, the seat will move rearward from the set

position when the key is removed from the ignition providing

that the seat is not in the full rearward position.

This feature can be turned on or off by performing the

following procedure.

1. Press and hold the Set (S) button.

2. Move the horizontal seat switch rearward.

3. Release the Set (S) button and the horizontal seat switch.

NOTE: The glide feature is only available on the driver’s

seat.

NOTE: These functions can be selected at the EVIC using

the Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features).

Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center — Personal

Settings for details.

Head Restraints

Head restraints can reduce the risk of whiplash injury in

the event of impact from the rear. Adjustable restraints

should be adjusted so that the upper edge is as high as

practical.

The head restraints have a locking button which must be

pushed in to lower the head restraint. The restraints may

be raised without pushing in the button.

Adjustable Head Restraint


Folding Rear Seat

Folding Rear Seats

The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to provide an

additional storage area. Pull on the loops shown in the

illustration to fold down either or both seatbacks. These

loops can be tucked away when not in use.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93

When the seat back is folded to the upright position make

sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the seat

back above the seat strap.

WARNING!

The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the

rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down

position) should not be used as a play area by

children when the vehicle is in motion. They could

be seriously injured in an accident. Children should

be seated and using the proper restraint system.

3


94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

ADJUSTABLE PEDALS

This feature allows both the brake and accelerator pedals

to move toward or away from the driver to provide

improved position with the steering wheel. The adjustable

pedal system is designed to allow a greater range of

driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and seat position.

The switch is located on the front side of the driver’s seat

cushion side shield.

Adjustable Pedal Switch

Press the switch forward to move the pedals forward

(toward the front of the vehicle).

Press the switch rearward to move the pedals rearward

(toward the driver).

• The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF.

• The pedals can be adjusted while driving.

• The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in R

(Reverse) or when the Speed Control is ON. A message

will be displayed in the Electronic Vehicle Information

Center (EVIC) if the pedals are attempted to be adjusted

when the system is locked out (“Adjustable

Pedal Disabled — Cruise Control Engaged” or “Adjustable

Pedal Disabled — Vehicle In Reverse”).

NOTE: Your remote keyless entry transmitter or

memory seat buttons on the driver’s door panel can be

used to recall the adjustable pedals to saved positions.

Refer to the “Seats” section for details.


CAUTION!

Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals

or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage

to the pedal controls. Pedal travel may become

limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in

the adjustable pedal’s path.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95

TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD

Two latches must be released to open the hood. First, pull

the hood release lever located under the left side of the

instrument panel. Hood Release Lever

3


96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Next, move to the outside of the vehicle and push the

safety catch to the left. The safety catch is located under

the center front edge of the hood.

Hood Safety Catch

Use the hood prop rod — if equipped to secure the hood

in the open position.

To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to

close it. Lower the hood until it is open approximately 6

inches (15 cm) and then drop it. This should secure both

latches. Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully

closed, with both latches engaged.

WARNING!

If the hood is not fully latched, it could fly up when

the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision.

You could have a collision. Be sure all hood latches

are fully latched before driving.


LIGHTS

Overhead Console Map/Reading Lights

These lights are mounted between the sun visors on the

overhead console. Each light is turned ON by pressing

the lens. Press the lens a second time to turn the light

OFF. The lights also turn on when a door is opened or the

dimmer control is turned fully upward, past the second

detent.

Overhead Console

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97

NOTE: The lights will remain on until the switch is

pressed a second time, so be sure they have been turned

off before leaving the vehicle.

Interior Lights

The interior lights come on when a door is opened.

The interior lights will automatically turn off 10 minutes

after the ignition switch is moved to the LOCK position

if they are switched on manually, or if a door is left open

to protect the battery. This includes the glove box, but not

the trunk. Turn the ignition switch ON, or cycle the

switchable lamp that was left on to restore the interior

light operation.

Dimmer Control

The dimmer control is part of the

headlamp switch, and is located on the

left side of the instrument panel. With

the parking lights or headlights on,

rotating the dimmer control upward

will increase the brightness of the instrument

panel lights.

3


98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Dome Light Position

Rotate the dimmer control completely upward to the

second detent to turn on the interior lights. The interior

lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this

position.

Interior light Defeat (OFF)

Rotate the dimmer control to the extreme bottom “OFF”

position. The interior lights will remain off when the

doors are open.

Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)

Rotate the dimmer control upward to the first detent.

This feature brightens all text displays such as the

odometer, Electronic Vehicle Information Center, and

radio when the parking lights or headlights are on.

Headlight Switch

The headlight switch is located on the left side of the

instrument panel. This switch controls the operation of

the headlights, parking lights, instrument panel lights,

instrument panel light dimming, interior lights, and fog

lights.

Headlight Switch


Multi-Function Lever

The multi-function lever controls the operation of the

turn signals, headlight beam selection, and passing

lights. The lever is located on the left side of the steering

column.

Multi-Function Lever

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99

Headlights, Parking Lights, Instrument Panel

Lights

Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent

for parking light and instrument panel light operation.

Turn to the second detent for headlight, park light and

instrument panel light operation.

Headlight Switch

3


100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Automatic Headlights

This system automatically turns your headlights ON or

OFF based on ambient light levels. To turn the system

ON, rotate the headlamp switch counter-clockwise to the

AUTO (A) position. When the system is ON, the Headlight

Time Delay feature is also ON. This means your

headlights will stay ON for up to 90 seconds after you

turn the ignition switch OFF. To turn the Automatic

System OFF, move the headlamp switch out of the AUTO

(A) position.

NOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights

will come ON in the Automatic mode.

Headlamps On With Wipers

The headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds

after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is

placed in the AUTO position. The headlights will also

turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were

turned on by this feature. This feature can be turned on or

off using the Electronic Vehicle Information Center

(EVIC). Refer to ”Headlamps On With Wipers” in the

Electronic Vehicle Information Center section of this

manual for details.

Daytime Running Lights (Canada Only)

The high beam headlights will come on as Daytime

Running Lights whenever the ignition switch is on, the

headlights are off, and the parking brake is off. The

headlight switch must be used for normal night time

driving.

Lights-on Reminder

If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition

is turned OFF, a chime will sound to alert the driver

when the driver’s door is opened.

Headlight Time Delay

This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination

for 90 seconds (programmable) when leaving your vehicle

in an unlighted area.

To activate the delay feature, turn off the ignition switch

while the headlights are still on. Then turn off the

headlights within 45 seconds. The 90 second delay interval

begins when headlight switch is turned off. If the

headlights or park lights are turned back on or the

ignition switch is turned on, the delay will be cancelled.


If the headlights are turned off before the ignition, they

will turn off in the normal manner.

NOTE: The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds

of turning the ignition off to activate this feature

The Headlamp delay time is programmable. Refer to

“Delay Turning Headlamps Off” in the Electronic Vehicle

Information Center section for details.

Fog Lights

The front fog light switch is on the headlamp

switch below the dimmer control. To activate the

front fog lights, turn on the parking lights or the

low beam headlights and press the fog lamp switch.

NOTE: The fog lights will operate with the low beam

headlights, or parking lights on. However, selecting the

high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights.

Turn Signals

Move the Multi-Function Lever up or down and the

arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to

show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal

lights. You can signal a lane change by moving the lever

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101

partially up or down without moving beyond the detent.

Releasing the lever at the detent will provide 3 flashes.

If either light has a very fast flash rate, check for a

defective outside light bulb. If an indicator fails to light

when the lever is moved, it would suggest that the fuse

or indicator bulb is defective or there may be a circuit

failure.

NOTE: The message “Turn Signal On” will appear in

the electronic vehicle information center (EVIC), and a

continuous chime will be heard when the vehicle has

been driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn

signal on.

Highbeam/Lowbeam Select Switch

Push the Multi-Function Lever away from you to switch

the headlights to HIGH beam. Pull the Lever towards

you to switch the headlights back to LOW beam.

Flash to Pass

You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by

lightly pulling the Multi-Function Lever toward you.

This will cause the headlights to turn on at high beam

and remain on until the lever is released.

3


102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS

The wipers and washers are operated by the

multi-function lever. The lever is located on the

left side of the steering column. Rotate the end of

the control lever to select the desired wiper speed.

CAUTION!

Turn the windshield wipers off when driving

through an automatic car wash. Damage to the

windshield wipers may result if the wiper switch is

left in any position other than OFF.

Windshield Wiper/Washer Control

Windshield Washers

To use the front washer, push the lever in and hold while

spray is desired. If the lever is released while in the delay

range, the wiper will operate for two wipe cycles after the

lever is released, and then resume the intermittent interval

previously selected.

If the lever is pushed while in the OFF position, the

wipers will operate for two wipe cycles, then turn OFF.


Rain Sensing Wipers

This feature senses moisture on the windshield and

automatically activates the wipers for the driver. The

feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray

from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate

the end of the multi-function lever to one of six settings

to activate this feature.

The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the

multi-function lever. Wiper delay position 1 is the least

sensitive, and wiper delay position 6 is the most sensitive.

Settings 3-4 should be used for normal rain conditions.

Settings 2 or 1 can be used if the driver desires less

wiper sensitivity. Settings 5 and 6 can be used if the

driver desires more sensitivity. Place the wiper switch in

the OFF position when not using the system.

NOTE:

• The rain sensing feature will not operate when the

wiper switch is in the LOW or HIGH speed position.

• The rain sensing feature may not function properly

when ice, or dried salt water is present on the windshield.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103

• Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or silicone

may reduce rain sensor performance.

• The rain sensing system will not operate when the

engine is running, the gear selector is in the PARK

position, and the outside temperature is below freezing.

This is done to protect the wiper blades from

damage. Place the gear selector in the DRIVE position

to allow the rain sensing feature to operate.

• A customer programmable feature in the Electronic

Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) allows the Rain

Sense feature to be turned off. Refer to “Personal

Settings” in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center

section of this manual for details.

Mist Feature

Push the wiper lever in to activate a single wipe to clear

off road mist or spray from a passing vehicle. As long as

the lever is pushed in, the wipers will continue to

operate.

3


104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Headlamps On With Wipers

The headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds

after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is

placed in the AUTO position. The headlights will also

turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were

turned on by this feature. This feature can be turned on or

off using the Electronic Vehicle Information Center

(EVIC). Refer to ”Headlamps On With Wipers” in the

Electronic Vehicle Information Center section of this

manual for details.

Windshield Wiper Operation

Rotate the end of the lever to the second detent for Low

speed wiper operation, or to the third detent for High

speed operation.

Intermittent Wiper System

Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions

make a single wiping cycle, with a variable pause between

cycles, desirable. Rotate the end of the lever to the

first detent position, then turn the end of the lever to

select the desired delay interval. There are 6 possible

delay wiper positions. The delay can be regulated from a

maximum of approximately 23 seconds between cycles,

to a cycle every second.

Adding Washer Fluid

The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the

front of the engine compartment on the passenger side

and should be checked for fluid level at regular intervals.

Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not

radiator antifreeze) and operate the system for a few

seconds to flush out the residual water.

Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir


The washer fluid reservoir will hold a full gallon of fluid

when “Low Washer Fluid” appears in the Electronic

Vehicle Information Center.

Headlight Washers

This feature operates in combination with the windshield

washers. To use the headlight washers, turn the headlights

ON and press in on the windshield washer control

knob while the engine is running.

Windshield Wiper/Washer Control

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105

This will operate the windshield washers and direct a

timed high pressure spray onto the headlight lens.

NOTE: The headlamp washers will operate on the first

spray of the windshield washers, then every fourth spray

of the windshield washers after that.

Headlamp Washer

3


106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Adding Washer Fluid

The headlamp washer system and windshield washer

system share the same fluid reservoir. The reservoir is

located in the front of the engine compartment on the

passenger side and should be checked for fluid level at

regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield

washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and operate the

system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water.

Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir

POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN

The power tilt/telescoping steering column lever is located

below the multi-function lever on the steering column. To tilt

the column move the lever up or down as desired. To

lengthen or shorten the steering column pull the lever

toward you or push the lever away from you as desired.

NOTE: Your remote keyless entry transmitter or

memory buttons on the driver’s door panel can be used

to recall the steering column tilt and telescopic positions.

Refer to the “Seats”section for details.

Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering


WARNING!

Moving the steering column while the vehicle is

moving is dangerous. Without a stable steering column

you could lose control of the vehicle and have

an accident. Adjust the column only while the vehicle

is stopped.

TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM (TCS)

WARNING!

TCS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from

acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction

afforded. The TCS cannot prevent accidents, including

those resulting from excessive speed in turns, or

hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful

driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of a

TCS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a

reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize

the user’s safety or the safety of others.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107

The traction control system is part of the electronic

stability program (ESP). The traction

control system (TCS) warning light is located in

the instrument cluster. The TCS light will flash

as soon as the tires lose traction and the wheels begin to

spin. This indicates that the TCS system is active. If the

TCS warning light begins to flash during acceleration,

ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as

possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the

prevailing road conditions. When the TCS warning light

is illuminated continuously, the TCS is switched off. To

return to the enhanced vehicle stability offered by TCS,

press the electronic stability program switch (the TCS

warning light in the instrument cluster goes out). Avoid

spinning one drive wheel. This may cause serious damage

to the drive train.

The electronic stability program switch is located on the

center of the instrument panel. To turn the traction

control system OFF press the electronic stability program

switch until the traction control Indicator in the instrument

cluster lights up.

3


108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving with

snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand or gravel,

switch off the TCS system by pressing the electronic

stability program switch.

Electronic Stability Program Switch

To turn the system back ON, press the electronic stability

program switch a second time until the traction control

Indicator turns OFF.

NOTE:

• The traction control system comes on each time the

ignition switch is turned ON. This will occur even if

you used the switch to turn the system OFF.

• The Traction Control system will make buzzing or

clicking sounds when in operation.

BRAKE ASSIST SYSTEM (BAS)

The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking

capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The

system applies optimum pressure to the brakes in emergency

braking conditions than might otherwise be afforded

solely by the driver’s braking style. This can help

reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the

antilock brake system (ABS). Applying the brakes very

quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the

benefit of the system, you must apply continuous braking

power during the stopping sequence. Do not reduce

brake pedal pressure.


WARNING!

BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from

acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase braking

efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of

the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded.

The BAS cannot prevent accidents, including those

resulting from excessive speed in turns, following

another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. Only a

safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.

The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle

must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous

manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or

the safety of others.

Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated.

The malfunction indicator lamp for the ESP is

combined with the BAS. The yellow BAS malfunction

indicator light and the yellow ESP

warning light in the instrument cluster both

come on with the key in the ignition switch turned to the

“ON” position. They should go out with the engine

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109

running. If the BAS/ESP malfunction indicator light

comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction

has been detected in either the BAS or the ESP

system. If this light stays illuminated, have the BAS and

ESP checked at your authorized dealer as soon as possible.

ELECTRONIC STABILITY PROGRAM (ESP)

WARNING!

ESP cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from

acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction

afforded. The ESP cannot prevent accidents, including

those resulting from excessive speed in turns, or

hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful

driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an

ESP-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a

reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize

the user’s safety or the safety of others.

3


110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

The ESP enhances directional control and reduces driving

wheel spin of the vehicle under various driving conditions.

The system operates when the vehicle speed is

greater than 7.8 mph (12.6 km/h).

The ESP system corrects for over/understeering of the

vehicle by applying brakes to the appropriate wheel.

Engine torque is also limited.

The ESP warning light, located in the instrument

cluster, starts to flash as soon as the ESP

system sensor’s information varies from the

driver’s intended path. The ESP warning light

also flashes when traction control is activated. If the ESP

warning light begins to flash during acceleration, ease up

on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible.

Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing

road conditions. When the ESP warning light is illuminated

continuously, the ESP is switched off. To return to

the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESP, press the

ESP switch (the ESP warning light in the instrument

cluster goes out). Avoid spinning one drive wheel. This

may cause serious damage to the drive train.

To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving with

snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand or gravel,

switch off the ESP system by pressing the ESP switch.

Electronic Stability Program Switch

With the ESP system switched off, the engine torque

reduction feature is cancelled. Therefore, the enhanced

vehicle stability offered by ESP is unavailable. ESP always

operates under braking, even with the switch in the

OFF position. When the ESP system is disabled (if one

drive wheel loses traction and begins to spin) the brake is

applied by the ESP system to control wheel slip. This


wheel slip control is active at vehicle speeds between

approximately 24 mph (40 km/h) and 50 mph (80 km/h).

CAUTION!

If the vehicle is towed with the front axle raised, the

engine must be shut off (key in the ignition switch to

the OFF/LOCK or ACC position). Otherwise the ESP

will immediately be engaged and will apply the rear

wheel brakes.

Synchronizing ESP

The malfunction indicator lamp for the ESP is

combined with the Brake Assist System (BAS).

If the power supply was interrupted (battery

disconnected or discharged), the ESP/BAS

malfunction indicator light may be illuminated with the

engine running. Turn the steering wheel completely to

the left and then to the right. The ESP/BAS malfunction

indicator light should go out.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111

ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL

When engaged, this device takes over the accelerator

operation at speeds greater than 25 mph (40 km/h). The

speed control switch consists of a stalk mounted lever

located on the steering column.

Speed Control Lever

3


112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

To Activate:

Push and release the speed control lever (“ON/OFF”)

once and an LED on the lever will illuminate indicating

that the electronic speed control is ON. To turn the

system OFF, Push and release the lever (“ON/OFF”)

again and the system and indicator will turn off.

WARNING!

Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on

when not in use is dangerous. You could accidently

set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.

You could lose control and have an accident. Always

leave the system OFF when you aren’t using it.

To Set At A Desired Speed:

When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, pull the

lever toward you and release. Release the accelerator and

the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.

NOTE: Speed control will only function in third, fourth,

or fifth gear when in the Autostick Mode.

NOTE: The speed control may not engage if a different

size tire is installed on one wheel, such as the compact

spare tire.

To Deactivate:

A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the lever away

from you (“CANCEL”) or normal braking while slowing

the vehicle will deactivate the speed control without

erasing the memory. Pushing and releasing the lever

(“ON/OFF”) or turning off the ignition erases the speed

memory.

To Resume Speed:

To resume a previously set speed, push the lever up and

release (“ACC/RES”). Resume can be used at any speed

above 20 mph (32 km/h).

To Vary the Speed Setting:

When the speed control is set, speed can be increased by

pushing the lever up and holding (“ACC/RES”). When

the lever is released, a new set speed will be established.


Pushing the lever up and releasing (“ACC/RES”) once

will result in a 1 mph (1.6 km/h) speed increase. Each

time the lever is pushed up and released, speed increases

so that pushing the lever up and releasing three times

will increase speed by 3 mph (4.8 km/h), etc.

To decrease speed while speed control is set, push the

lever down and hold (“COAST”). Release the lever when

the desired speed is reached, and the new speed will be

set.

Pushing down and releasing the lever (“COAST”) once

will result in a 1 mph (2 km/h) speed decrease. Each time

the lever is pushed down and released, speed decreases.

To Accelerate For Passing:

Depress the accelerator as you would normally. When the

pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.

NOTE: The speed control system maintains speed up

and down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills

is normal.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113

Four speed automatic transmissions will experience a

downshift to 3rd gear while climbing uphill or descending

downhill. This downshift to 3rd gear is necessary to

maintain vehicle set speed.

On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so

it may be preferable to drive without speed control.

WARNING!

Speed Control can be dangerous where the system

can’t maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could

go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose

control. An accident could be the result. Don’t use

Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are

winding, icy, snow-covered, or slippery.

3


114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

OVERHEAD CONSOLE

The overhead console contains courtesy/reading lights,

an optional universal garage door opener (HomeLink),

storage for sunglasses, and optional power sunroof

switches.

Overhead Console

Courtesy/Reading Lights

At the forward end of the console are two courtesy/

reading lights.

Press the lens to turn these lights on. Press a second time

to turn the lights off.

The lights also turn on when a front door or rear door is

opened. The lights will also turn on when the unlock

button on the remote keyless entry transmitter is pressed.

Sunglasses Storage

At the rear of the console a compartment is provided for

the storage of a pair of sunglasses.

The storage compartment access is a push/push design.

Push the finger depression on the overhead console to

open. Push the finger depression to close.


GARAGE DOOR OPENER

The HomeLink Universal Transceiver replaces up to

three remote controls (hand held transmitters) that operate

devices such as garage door openers, motorized

gates, or home lighting. It triggers these devices at the

push of a button. The Universal Transceiver operates off

your vehicle’s battery and charging system; no batteries

are needed.

NOTE: The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled

when the Vehicle Theft Alarm is active.

For additional information on HomeLink, call 1–800–

355–3515, or on the internet at www.homelink.com.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115

WARNING!

A moving garage door can cause injury to people and

pets in the path of the door. People or pets could be

seriously or fatally injured. Only use this transceiver

with a garage door opener that has a “stop and

reverse” feature as required by federal safety standards.

This includes most garage door opener models

manufactured after 1982. Do not use a garage

door opener without these safety features it could

cause injury or death. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515

or, on the Internet at www.homelink.com for safety

information or assistance.

Programming HomeLink

NOTE: When programming a garage door opener, it is

advised to park outside the garage. It is also recommended

that a new battery be placed in the hand-held

transmitter of the device being programmed to

HomeLink for quicker training and accurate transmission

of the radio-frequency signal.

3


116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) features

a driver-interactive display which includes

HomeLink system messages. The EVIC is located in the

upper part of the cluster between the speedometer and

tachometer.

Electronic Vehicle Information Center

1. Press and hold the two outer HomeLink buttons, and

release only when the EVIC display shows “Channels

Cleared” (after 20 seconds). Do not hold the buttons for

longer than 30 seconds and do not repeat step one to

program a second and/or third hand-held transmitter to

the remaining two HomeLink buttons.

HomeLink Buttons

WARNING!

Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous

gas. Do not run the vehicle’s exhaust while

training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause serious

injury or death.


WARNING!

Your motorized door or gate will open and close

while you are training the Universal Transceiver. Do

not train the transceiver if people or pets are in the

path of the door or gate. A moving door or gate can

cause serious injury or death to people and pets or

damage to objects.

2. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter 1-3

inches (3-8 cm) away from the HomeLink buttons.

3. Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink

button that you want to train and the hand-held transmitter

buttons. Do not release the buttons until step 4

has been completed.

NOTE: Some gate operators and garage door openers

may require you to replace this Programming Step 3 with

procedures noted in the Gate Operator/Canadian Programming

section.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117

4. The EVIC display will show “Channel X Training”

(where X is Channel 1, 2, or 3). Release both buttons after

the EVIC display shows “Channel X Trained”.

NOTE: If the EVIC display shows “Did Not Train”

repeat steps 2–4.

5. Press and hold the just trained HomeLink button and

observe the EVIC display. If the EVIC display shows

“Channel X Transmit” (where X is Channel 1, 2, or 3),

programming is complete and your device should activate

when the HomeLink button is pressed and released.

NOTE: To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons,

begin with Programming step two. Do not repeat

step one.

NOTE: If your hand-held transmitter appears to program

the universal transceiver, but your garage door

does not operate using the transmitter and your garage

door opener was manufactured after 1995, your garage

door opener may have a multiple security code system

(rolling code system). Please proceed to steps 6–8 to

3


118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

complete the programming of a rolling code equipped

device (most common garage door openers require this

step.

6. At the garage door opener receiver (motor-head unit)

in the garage, locate the learn or smart button. This

can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is

attached to the motor-head unit.

7. Firmly press and release the learn or smart button.

(The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer.)

NOTE: There are 30 seconds in which to initiate step

eight.

8. Return to the vehicle and firmly press, hold for two

seconds and release the programmed HomeLink button.

Repeat the press/hold/release sequence a second time,

and, depending on the brand of the garage door opener

(or other rolling code equipped device), repeat this

sequence a third time to complete the programming.

HomeLink should now activate your rolling code

equipped device.

NOTE: To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons,

begin with Programming step two. Do not repeat

step one. For questions or comments, please contact

HomeLink at www.homelink.com or 1-800-355-3515.

Canadian Programming/Gate Programming

Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter signals

to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of

transmission which may not be long enough for

HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming.

Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are

designed to time-out in the same manner.

If you live in Canada or you are having difficulties

programming a gate operator by using the Programming

procedures (regardless of where you live), replace

Programming HomeLink step 3 with the following:

NOTE: If programming a garage door opener or gate

operator, it is advised to unplug the device during the

cycling process to prevent possible overheating.

3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button

while you press and release every two seconds (cycle)

your hand-held transmitter until the frequency signal has

successfully been accepted by HomeLink. The EVIC


display will show “Channel X Trained” (where X is

Channel 1, 2, or 3). Proceed with Programming step

four to complete.

Using HomeLink

To operate, simply press and release the programmed

HomeLink button. Activation will now occur for the

trained device (i.e. garage door opener, gate operator,

security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting,

etc.). For convenience, the hand-held transmitter of the

device may also be used at any time. In the event that

there are still programming difficulties or questions,

contact HomeLink at: www.homelink.com or 1-800-355-

3515.

Erasing HomeLink Buttons

To erase programming from the three buttons (individual

buttons cannot be erased but can be reprogrammed -

note below), follow the step noted:

• Press and hold the two outer HomeLink buttons and

release only when the EVIC display shows “Channels

Cleared” (after 20 seconds). Release both buttons. Do

not hold for longer that 30 seconds. HomeLink is now

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119

in the train (or learning) mode and can be programmed

at any time beginning with Programming

- step 2.

Reprogramming a Single HomeLink Button

To program a device to HomeLink using a HomeLink

button previously trained, follow these steps:

1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button. Do

NOT release the button.

2. The EVIC display will show “Channel X Transmit”

(where X is Channel 1, 2, or 3) for 20 seconds and then

change to “Channel X Training”. Without releasing the

HomeLink button, proceed with Programming step 2.

For questions or comments, contact HomeLink at:

www.homelink.com or 1-800-355-3515.

Security

If you sell your vehicle, be sure to erase the frequencies

by following the “Erasing HomeLink Buttons” instructions

in this section.

3


120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with

RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the

following conditions:

• This device may not cause harmful interference.

• This device must accept any interference that may be

received including interference that may cause undesired

operation.

NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved

by the party responsible for compliance could

void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

HomeLink is a trademark owned by Johnson Controls,

Inc.

POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED

The power sunroof switch is located between the sun

visors on the overhead console.

Power Sunroof Controls


WARNING!

• Never leave children in a vehicle, with the keys in

the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unattended

children, can become entrapped by the

power sunroof while operating the power sunroof

switch. Such entrapment may result in serious

injury or death.

• In an accident, there is a greater risk of being

thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You

could also be seriously injured or killed. Always

fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all

passengers are properly secured too.

• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.

Never allow fingers or other body parts, or

any object to project through the sunroof opening.

Injury may result.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121

Opening Sunroof - Express

Press the switch rearward and release, and the sunroof

will open automatically from any position. The sunroof

will open fully, then stop automatically. This is called

Express Open. During Express Open operation, any

movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.

Closing Sunroof - Express

Press the switch forward and release, and the sunroof

will close automatically from any position. The sunroof

will close fully and stop automatically. This is called

Express Close. During Express Close operation, any

movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.

Pinch Protect Feature

This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of

the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obstruction

in the path of the sunroof is detected, the

sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruction

if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward and

release to Express Close.

3


122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Pinch Protect Override

If a known obstruction (ice, debris, etc.) prevents closing,

press the switch forward and hold for two seconds after

the reversal occurs. This allows the sunroof to move

towards the closed position.

NOTE: Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is

pressed.

Venting Sunroof - Express

Press and release the V button, and the sunroof will

open to the vent position. This is called Express Vent, and

will occur regardless of sunroof position. During Express

Vent operation, any movement of the switch will stop the

sunroof.

Sunshade Operation

The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the

sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.

NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is

open.

Wind Buffeting

Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of

pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the

ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the

windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain

open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence

and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with

the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows

together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs

with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to

minimize the buffeting or open any window.

Sunroof Maintenance

Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean

the glass panel.

Ignition Off Operation

The power sunroof switches remain active for 10 minutes

after the ignition switch has been turned off. Opening

either front door will cancel this feature. This feature is

programmable through the Electronic Vehicle Information

Center (EVIC). Refer to “Delay Power Off to Accessories


Until Exit” under “Personal Settings” in the Electronic

Vehicle Information Center section of this manual for

details.

Sunroof Fully Closed

Press the switch forward and release to ensure that the

sunroof is fully closed.

ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS

There are two 12-volt electrical outlets on this vehicle.

Both of the outlets are protected by a fuse.

The 12 volt power outlet next to the ash receiver tray (if

equipped with an optional Smoker’s Package) has power

available only when the ignition is on. This outlet will

also operate a conventional cigar lighter unit.

WARNING!

Do not place ashes inside the cubby bin located on

the center console on vehicles not equipped with the

ash receiver tray. A fire leading to bodily injury

could result.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123

NOTE: If desired, the power outlet next to the ash tray

receiver (if equipped) can be converted by your authorized

dealer to provide power with the ignition switch in

the LOCK position.

Front Power Outlet

3


124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

The center console outlet is powered directly from the

battery (power available at all times). Items plugged into

this outlet may discharge the battery and/or prevent

engine starting.

Center Console Power Outlet

Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off

CAUTION!

• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw

power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not

in use (i.e. cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if

plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will

discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life

and/or prevent engine starting.

• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e. coolers,

vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will degrade the

battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently

and with greater caution.

• After the use of high power draw accessories, or

long periods of the vehicle not being started (with

accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be

driven a sufficient length of time to allow the

alternator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.

• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs

only. Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory

bracket from the plug. Improper use of the

power outlet can cause damage.


CUPHOLDERS

Front Seat Cupholders

The cupholders are located in the forward edge of the

center console.

Push down on the cover as shown to expose the cupholders.

Close the cover when the cupholders are no longer

needed.

Front Seat Cupholders

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125

Rear Seat Cupholders

The rear seat cupholders are located in the center armrest

between the rear seats. The cup holders are positioned

forward in the armrest and side-by-side to provide

convenient access to beverage cans or bottles while

maintaining a resting place for the rear occupants’ elbows.

Rear Seat Cupholders

3


126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

STORAGE

Console Features

The center console includes a large internal storage bin.

The storage bin has a rubber mat for noise control. The

bin is also large enough to hold a portable AC/DC

converter to power lap tops, games, or other electrical

equipment. Two slots at the top right side of the bin

provide clearance for power cords to pass conveniently

out of the bin with the lid closed. This feature is ideal for

games, laptops, cell phones or other electrical equipment.

A four-slot coin holder can hold US dollar coins or

Canadian one and two-dollar coins, as well as quarters,

dimes and nickels. The bin has a Front-opening lid for

easy access inside by either the driver or front passenger.

There are also two shift bezel cubby bins with rubber

mats for holding small items. For vehicles not equipped

with the navigation radio, an extra storage bin is provided

below the climate controls that holds up to four CD

jewel cases. The inside portion of the arm rest lid contains

a pen holder, a tissue holder, and a tire gauge holder.

Cargo Tie-Down Hooks

The tie-downs located on cargo area floor and on the rear

trim panels should be used to safely secure loads when

vehicle is moving.

WARNING!

• Cargo tie-down hooks are not safe anchors for a

child seat tether strap. In a sudden stop or collision

a hook could pull loose and allow the child

seat to come loose. A child could be badly injured.

Use only the anchors provided for child seat

tethers.

• The weight and position of cargo and passengers

can change the vehicle center of gravity and

vehicle handling. To avoid loss of control resulting

in personal injury, follow these guidelines for

loading your vehicle:

• Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put

heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible.


• Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear

axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight

over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of the

vehicle to sway.

• Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the

seatback. This could impair visibility or become a

dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127

WARNING!

To help protect against personal injury, passengers

should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear

cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes

only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats and

use seat belts.

3


CONTENTS

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Instruments And Controls ................132

Premium Instrument Cluster ..............133

Instrument Cluster Descriptions ...........134

Electronic Vehicle Information Center

(EVIC) ..............................140

▫ Trip Functions .......................142

▫ Compass Display .....................143

▫ Telephone — If Equipped ...............145

▫ Navigation — If Equipped ...............146

▫ System Warnings (Customer Information

Features) ...........................147

▫ Personal Settings (Customer Programmable

Features) ...........................147

Setting The Analog Clock ................151

Sales Code RAK – AM/FM/Cassette/CD

(6-Disc) Radio With Optional Satellite Radio,

Hands Free Phone, Video, MP3, And WMA

Capabilities ..........................151

▫ Operating Instructions - Radio Mode .......151

▫ Operating Instructions — Tape Player .......155

▫ Seek Button .........................155

▫ Fast Forward (FF) .....................155

▫ Rewind (RW) ........................155

▫ Tape Eject ...........................156

4


130 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

▫ Scan Button .........................156

▫ Changing Tape Direction ................156

▫ Metal Tape Selection ...................156

▫ Pinch Roller Release ...................156

▫ Noise Reduction ......................156

▫ Operation Instructions - (CD Mode For

CD Audio Play) ......................156

▫ Load/Eject Button (CD Mode For

CD Audio Play) ......................157

▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files .............159

▫ Operation Instructions - (CD Mode For MP3

And WMA Audio Play) .................161

▫ Load/Eject Button (CD Mode For MP3 And

WMA Play) .........................161

Satellite Radio — If Equipped .............163

▫ System Activation .....................163

▫ Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification

Number (ESN/SID) ....................163

▫ Selecting Satellite Mode In REF And

RAK Radio ..........................164

▫ Selecting a Channel ....................164

▫ Storing And Selecting Pre-Set Channels ......165

▫ Using The PTY (Program Type) Button (If

Equipped) ..........................165

▫ PTY Button Scan .....................165

▫ PTY Button Seek .....................165

▫ Satellite Antenna ......................165

▫ Reception Quality .....................165

Navigation System (Sales Code REC) — If

Equipped ............................166

Remote Sound System Controls ...........166

▫ Radio Operation ......................167

▫ Tape Player .........................167


▫ CD Player ..........................168

▫ Satellite ............................168

Radio General Information ...............168

▫ Radio Broadcast Signals .................168

▫ Two Types Of Signals ..................168

▫ Electrical Disturbances ..................169

▫ AM Reception .......................169

▫ FM Reception ........................169

Cassette Tape And Player Maintenance ......169

CD/DVD Disc Maintenance ..............170

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 131

Radio Operation And Cellular Phones .......171

Climate Controls ......................171

▫ Automatic Temperature Control ...........171

▫ Summer Operation ....................176

▫ Winter Operation .....................177

▫ Vacation Storage ......................177

▫ Window Fogging .....................177

▫ Outside Air Intake ....................177

▫ A/C Air Filter — If Equipped ............177

▫ Operating Tips .......................178

4


132 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS


PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 133

4


134 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS

1. Oil Pressure Warning Light

This light shows low engine oil pressure. The

light should turn on momentarily when the

engine is started. If the light turns on while driving,

stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as

possible. A continuous chime will sound when this

light turns on.

Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.

This light does not show how much oil is in the engine.

The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.

2. Low Fuel Indicator Light

The Low Fuel Light will turn on when there is

approximately 2 gallons (9 liters) of fuel remaining

in the tank. This light will remain on until

fuel is added.

3. Front Fog Light Indicator

This light shows the front fog lights are ON.

4. Turn Signal Indicators

The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal

when the turn signal lever is operated.

If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle has

traveled about one mile with the turn signals on, a chime

will sound to alert you to turn the signals off. If either

indicator flashes at a rapid rate, check for a defective

outside light bulb.

5. Speedometer

Indicates vehicle speed.

6. Electronic Vehicle Information Center Display

When the appropriate conditions exist, this display

shows the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)

messages. Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center

for specific messages.

7. Tachometer

The red segments indicate the maximum permissible

engine revolutions-per-minute (r.p.m. x 1000) for each

gear range. Before reaching the red area, ease up on the

accelerator.


8. Engine Temperature Warning Light

This light illuminates, and will be accompanied

by a single chime to warn of an overheated

engine condition. The engine temperature is

critically hot, and the vehicle should be turned off

immediately. The vehicle should be serviced as soon

as possible.

9. Anti-Lock Brake Light

This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System.

The light will turn on when the ignition switch

is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as

long as four seconds.

If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it

indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system

is not functioning and that service is required. However,

the conventional brake system will continue to operate

normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.

If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced

as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock

brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the

Ignition switch is turned to the ON position, have the

light inspected by an authorized dealer.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 135

10. Electronic Stability Program (ESP)/Brake Assist

System (BAS) Warning Light

The yellow ESP warning light in the instrument

cluster and the yellow BAS malfunction

indicator light both come on with the

key in the ignition switch turned to the

“ON” position. They should go out with the engine

running. If the ESP/BAS malfunction indicator light

comes on continuously with the engine running, a

malfunction has been detected in either the ESP or the

BAS system. If this light stays illuminated, have the

ESP and BAS checked at your authorized dealer as

soon as possible.

11. Airbag Light

This light turns on and remains on for 6 to 8

seconds as a bulb check when the ignition

switch is first turned ON. If the light is not

on during starting, stays on, or turns on

while driving, have the system inspected by an authorized

dealer as soon as possible.

4


136 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

12. Brake System Warning Light

This light monitors various brake functions,

including brake fluid level and parking

brake application. If the brake light turns on,

it may indicate that the parking brake is

applied, there is a low brake fluid level or there is a

problem with the anti-lock brake system.

The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity

in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic

system. Failure of either half of the dual brake system is

indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on

when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has

dropped below a specified level.

The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.

NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp

cornering maneuvers which change fluid level conditions.

The vehicle should have service performed, and

the brake fluid level checked.

If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.

WARNING!

Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is dangerous.

Part of the brake system may have failed. It will

take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have an

accident. Have the vehicle checked immediately.

Vehicles equipped with Anti-Lock brakes (ABS), are also

equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD).

In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light

will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair

to the ABS system is required.

The operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked

by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to

the ON position. The light should illuminate for approximately

two seconds. The light should then turn off unless

the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected.

If the light does not illuminate, have the light inspected

by an authorized dealer.


The light also will turn on when the parking brake is

applied with the ignition switch in the ON position.

NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is

applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.

13. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator

Light

If this indicator light flashes during acceleration,

apply as little throttle as possible. While

driving, ease up on the accelerator. Adapt

your speed and driving to the prevailing

road conditions, and do not switch off the ESP.

14. Temperature Gauge

The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature.

Any reading within the normal range indicates that

the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.

The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature

when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,

or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to

exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 137

CAUTION!

Driving with a hot engine cooling system could

damage your vehicle. If temperature gauge reads (H),

pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with

the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops

back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on

the “H”, and you hear continuous chimes, turn the

engine off immediately, and call for service.

WARNING!

A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or

others could be badly burned by steam or boiling

coolant. You may want to call a service center if your

vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the

hood yourself, see Section 7 of this manual. Follow

the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure

Cap paragraph.

4


138 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

15. Trip Odometer Button

Press this button to change the display from odometer to

either of the two trip odometer settings. The letter “A” or

“B” will appear when in the trip odometer mode. Push in

and hold the button for two seconds to reset the trip

odometer to 0 miles or kilometers. The odometer must be

in trip mode to reset.

16. High Beam Light

This light shows that the headlights are on high

beam. Push the Multi-Function lever away from

the steering wheel to switch the headlights to high

beam.

17. Transmission Range Indicator

This display indicator shows the automatic transmission

gear selection.

18. Seat Belt Reminder Light

When the ignition switch is first turned ON, this

light will turn on for 5 to 8 seconds as a bulb

check. During the bulb check, if the driver’s seat

belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound. After the bulb

check or when driving, if the driver seat belt remains

unbuckled, the Seat Belt Warning Light will flash or

remain on continuously. Refer to Enhanced Driver

Seat Belt Reminder System (BeltAlert) in the Occupant

Restraints section for more information.

19. Fuel Gauge

The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when

the ignition switch is in the ON position.

20. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light

This light informs you of a problem with the

Electronic Throttle Control system. If a problem

is detected the light will come on while

the engine is running. Cycle the ignition key

when the vehicle has completely stopped and the gear

selector is placed in the PARK position. The light

should turn off. If the light remains lit with the engine

running your vehicle will usually be drivable, however,

see your dealer for service as soon as possible. If

the light is flashing when the engine is running,

immediate service is required and you may experience

reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle or engine

stall and your vehicle may require towing. The

light will come on when the ignition is first turned on


and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does

not come on during starting, have the system checked

by an authorized dealer.

21. Voltage Light

This light monitors the electrical system voltage.

The light should turn on momentarily as

the engine is started. If the light stays on or turns on

while driving, it indicates a problem with the charging

system. Immediate service should be obtained.

22. Malfunction Indicator Light

This light is part of an onboard diagnostic

system called OBD that monitors engine and

automatic transmission control systems. The

light will illuminate when the key is in the ON

position before engine start. If the bulb does not come

on when turning the key from OFF to ON, have the

condition checked promptly.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 139

Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap,

poor fuel quality, etc. may illuminate the light after

engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light

stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In

most situations the vehicle will drive normally and will

not require towing.

The Malfunction Indicator Light flashes to alert you to

serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of

power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle

should be serviced as soon as possible if this occurs.

4


140 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER

(EVIC)

Electronic Vehicle Information Center

The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) features

a driver-interactive display. It is located in the

upper part of the cluster between the speedometer and

tachometer. The EVIC consists of the following:

• System Status

• Vehicle information warning message displays

• Personal Settings (customer programmable features)

• Compass display

• Outside temperature display

• Trip computer functions

• UConnect hands-free communication system displays

— If Equipped

• Navigation system screens

• Audio mode display

The system allows the driver to select information by

pressing the following switches mounted on the steering

wheel:

Press and release the MENU button and the

mode displayed will change between Trip

Functions, Navigation (If Equipped), System

Warnings, System Status, Personal Settings,

and Telephone (If Equipped).

Pressing the FUNCTION SELECT button accepts

a selected choice. The Function Select

button also advances the radio preset when the

EVIC is in the Compass/Temp/Audio screen.


Use the SCROLL buttons to scroll through Trip

Functions, Navigation (If Equipped), System

Warnings, System Status Messages, and Personal

Settings (Customer Programmable Features).

The SCROLL buttons also seek up and down

(radio station or CD track number).

The AUDIO MODE SELECT button is used to

select the Compass/Temp/Audio screen. If

Compass/Temp/Audio is already being displayed

when the AUDIO MODE SELECT button

is pressed, the radio mode will change from AM to

FM to Tape to CD, or to Satellite (SAT) depending on

which radio is in the vehicle. This button can also be used

to return to a previous navigation menu selection.

When the appropriate conditions exist, the Electronic

Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) displays the following

messages.

• Turn Signal On (with a continuous warning chime)

• Left Front Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single chime)

• Left Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single chime)

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 141

• Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single

chime)

• Right Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single

chime)

• RKE Battery Low (with a single chime)

• Memory #1/#2 Profile Set

• Memory #1/#2 Profile Recall

• Memory System Disabled – Vehicle Not In Park (with

a single chime)

• Memory System Disabled – Seat Belt Buckled (with a

single chime)

• Personal Settings Not Available – Vehicle Not in Park

• Left/Right Front Door Ajar (one or more, with a single

chime if speed is above 1 mph)

• Left/Right Rear Door Ajar (one or more, with a single

chime if speed is above 1 mph)

• Door (S) Ajar (with a single chime if vehicle is in

motion)

4


142 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Trunk Ajar (with a single chime)

• Low Washer Fluid (with a single chime)

• Adjustable Pedals Disabled – Cruise Engaged (with a

single chime) — only available on vehicles equipped

with memory seats.

• Adjustable Pedals Disabled – Vehicle In Reverse (with

a single chime) — only available on vehicles equipped

with memory seats.

• Channel 1, 2, OR 3 Transmit

• Channel 1, 2, OR 3 Training

• Channel 1, 2, OR 3 Trained

• Clearing Channels

• Channels Cleared

• Channels Defaulted

• Did Not Train

• Service Park Assist System (with a single chime)

Trip Functions

Press and release the MENU button until one of the Trip

Functions is displayed in the EVIC.

Use the SCROLL buttons to cycle through all the Trip

Computer functions.

The Trip Functions mode displays information on the

following:

• Average Miles Per Gallon (MPG)

Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset.

When the fuel economy is reset it will go to 0.0.

• Distance To Empty (DTE)

Shows the estimated distance that can be travelled with

the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is

determined using the MPG for the last few minutes. This

is not resettable.

• Trip A

Shows the total distance travelled for trip A since the last

reset.


• Trip B

Shows the total distance travelled for trip B since the last

reset.

• Elapsed Time

Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset

when the ignition switch is in the ACC position. Elapsed

time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON

or START position.

• Display Units of Measure in:

Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button when

in this display until “US” or “METRIC” appears to make

your selection.

To Reset The Display

Pressing and releasing the FUNCTION SELECT button

once will clear the resettable function currently being

displayed. Reset will only occur if a resettable function is

currently being displayed. To reset all resettable functions,

press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button a

second time within 3 seconds of resetting the currently

displayed function (>Reset ALL will be displayed during

this 3 second window).

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 143

Compass Display

Press and release the compass button to display

one of eight compass readings to indicate

the direction the vehicle is facing, and the

outside temperature.

Automatic Compass Calibration

This compass is self calibrating which eliminates the

need to manually set the compass. When the vehicle is

new, the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will

display “CAL” until the compass is calibrated. You may

also calibrate the compass by completing one or more

360° turns in an area free from large metal or metallic

objects until the “CAL” message displayed in the EVIC

turns off. The compass will now function normally.

Manual Compass Calibration

If the compass appears erratic and the “CAL” message

does not appear in the EVIC display, you must put the

compass into the Calibration Mode manually.

To put into a Calibration Mode: Turn on the ignition

switch. Press and hold the compass button for approximately

2 seconds. Use the SCROLL buttons until “Calibrate

Compass” is highlighted. Press and release the

4


144 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

FUNCTION SELECT button to start the calibration. The

message “CAL” will appear in the EVIC. Complete one

or more 360° turns in an area free from large metal objects

until the “CAL” message turns off. The compass will now

function normally.

Compass Variance

Compass Variance is the difference between magnetic

North and Geographic North. In some areas of the

country, the difference between magnetic and geographic

North is great enough to cause the compass to give false

readings. If this occurs, the compass variance must be set.

NOTE: Magnetic materials should be kept away from

the overhead console. This is where the compass sensor is

located.


To set the variance: Turn the ignition switch ON. Press

and hold the compass button for approximately 2 seconds.

Use the SCROLL buttons until “Compass Variance”

is highlighted. The “Compass Variance” message and the

last variance zone number will be displayed. Press and

release FUNCTION SELECT button until the proper

variance zone is selected according to the map. Press and

release the compass button to exit.

Telephone — If Equipped

Press and release the MENU button until Telephone is

displayed in the EVIC.

When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC provides

the following telephone information:

• Phone status: idle, voice mail, roaming, battery

strength and signal strength in increments of 20 percent.

• Call status: Incoming call, connecting, connected, air

time in minutes and seconds, call ended, call failed,

roaming and no phone connection.

• U-Connect Active.

• Caller ID phone number display.

When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC will

display the following telephone symbols:

The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate the

signal strength of the U-Connect phone. The

number of horizontal bars increase as the

Signal

Strength

Incoming

Call

Analog

Roaming

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 145

strength of the U-Connect phone signal increases.

The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate an

incoming call.

The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate that

the U-Connect phone is currently in analog

mode.

The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate that

the U-Connect phone is currently in roaming.

4


146 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Voice

Mail

Text

Message

Battery

Strength

Call in

Progress

The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate that

you have voice mail.

The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate a

text message.

The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate the

battery strength of the U-Connect phone.

The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate that

a phone connection has been made.

Phone

Not

Available

The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate that

the U-Connect phone is currently not available.

Navigation — If Equipped

Navigation Display Control

Press and release the MENU button until Navigation is

displayed in the EVIC. When the Navigation System is

On, the steering wheel buttons can be used to select the

Map or Menu display on the Navigation Unit. When the

Menu display is active, the SCROLL buttons can be used

to scroll through the list, the FUNCTION SELECT button

can be used to select an item, and the AUDIO MODE

SELECT button can be used to return to the previous

menu. When the Map display is active, pressing the

FUNCTION SELECT button will change the Navigation

Unit Display to the Menu.


Turn By Turn Directions

If Turn by Turn Navigation is enabled through Personal

Settings, the Navigation System will provide turn by turn

directions to the programmed destination in the EVIC

display. The name of the approaching road is displayed

at the top of the screen, followed by an arrow to show the

direction of the turn and the remaining distance to the

turn counted down.

System Warnings (Customer Information

Features)

Press and release the MENU button until “SYSTEM

WARNINGS” is displayed in the EVIC. Use the SCROLL

buttons to display one of the following choices:

• Oil Temperature

Shows the actual oil temperature.

• Oil Pressure

Shows the actual oil pressure.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 147

Personal Settings (Customer Programmable

Features)

This allows the driver to set and recall features when the

transmission is in PARK.

Press and release the MENU button until Personal Settings

is displayed in the EVIC.

Use the SCROLL buttons to display one of the following

choices:

Language

When in this display you may select different languages

for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions

and navigation system. Pressing the FUNCTION SE-

LECT button while in this display selects English, Espanol,

Deutsch, Italiano, or Francais depending on availability.

As you continue the displayed information will be

shown in the selected language.

Display English or Metric

The EVIC, odometer, and navigation system units can be

changed between English and Metric.

4


148 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button when

in this display until “US” or “METRIC” appears to make

your selection.

Lock Doors Automatically at 15 MPH (24 Km/h)

When ON is selected all doors lock automatically when

the speed of the vehicle reaches 15 mph (24 km/h). Press

and release the FUNCTION SELECT button when in this

display until “ON” or “OFF” appears to make your

selection.

Auto Unlock On Exit

When ON is selected all the vehicle’s doors will unlock

when the driver’s door is opened if the vehicle is stopped

and the transmission is in P (Park) or N (Neutral)

position. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT

button when in this display until “ON” or “OFF” appears

to make your selection.

Remote Unlock Driver’s Door 1st

When DRIVER’S DOOR 1ST is selected only the driver’s

door will unlock on the first press of the remote

keyless entry unlock button and require a second press to

unlock the remaining locked doors. When REMOTE

UNLOCK ALL DOORS is selected all of the doors will

unlock at the first press of the remote keyless entry

unlock button. Press and release the FUNCTION SE-

LECT button when in this display until “DRIVER’S

DOOR 1ST” or “ALL DOORS” appears to make your

selection.

Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock

When ON is selected the memory seat, mirror, and radio

settings will return to the memory set position when the

remote keyless entry “Unlock” button is pressed. If this

feature is not selected then the memory seat, mirror, and

radio settings can only return to the memory set position

using the door mounted switch. Press and release the

FUNCTION SELECT button when in this display until

“ON” or “OFF” appears to make your selection.

Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock

When ON is selected a short horn sound will occur when

the remote keyless entry “Lock” button is pressed. This

feature may be selected with or without the flash lights

on lock/unlock feature. Press and release the FUNC-

TION SELECT button when in this display until “ON” or

“OFF” appears to make your selection.


Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock

When ON is selected, the front and rear turn signals will

flash when the doors are locked or unlocked using the

remote keyless entry transmitter. This feature may be

selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature

selected. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT

button when in this display until “ON” or “OFF” appears

to make your selection.

Delay Turning Headlamps Off

When this feature is selected the driver can choose to

have the headlamps remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds

when exiting the vehicle. Press and release the FUNC-

TION SELECT button when in this display until 0, 30, 60,

or 90 appears to make your selection.

Headlamps On With Wipers

When ON is selected and the headlight switch is in the

AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approximately

10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. The

headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned

off if they were turned on by this feature. Press and

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 149

release the FUNCTION SELECT button when in this

display until “ON” or “OFF” appears to make your

selection.

NOTE: Turning the headlights on during the daytime

causes the instrument panel lights to dim. To increase the

brightness, refer to “Lights” in this section.

Rain Sensing Intermittent Wipers

When ON is selected the system senses moisture on the

windshield and automatically activates the wipers for the

driver. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button

when in this display until “ON” or “OFF” appears to

make your selection. When OFF the system reverts to

standard intermittent wiper operation.

Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit

When this feature is selected, the power window

switches, radio, hands–free system, DVD video system,

power sunroof, and power outlets will remain active for

up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch has been turned

off. Opening a vehicle door will cancel this feature. Press

and release the FUNCTION SELECT button when in this

display until “Off”, “45 sec.”, “5 min.”, “10 min.”, “30

min.”, or “60 min.” appears to make your selection.

4


150 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Turn Headlamps on with Remote Key Unlock

When this feature is selected the headlamps will activate

and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are

unlocked using the remote keyless entry transmitter.

Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button when

in this display until “OFF”, “30 sec.”, “60 sec.”, or “90

sec.” appears to make your selection.

Tilt Mirrors Down on Reverse

When ON is selected the outside rearview mirrors will

tilt down when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE with

the ignition switch in the RUN position. The mirrors

move back to their previous position when the vehicle is

shifted out of REVERSE. Press and release the FUNC-

TION SELECT button when in this display until “ON” or

“OFF” appears to make your selection.

Park Assist System

When ON is selected and the driver places the gear

selector in Reverse or Neutral the system will scan for

objects behind the vehicle. Press and release the FUNC-

TION SELECT button when in this display until “ON” or

“OFF” appears to make your selection.

Confirmation of Voice Commands — If Equipped

When ON is selected all voice commands from the

U-Connect system are confirmed. Press and release the

FUNCTION SELECT button when in this display until

“ON” or “OFF” appears to make your selection.

Turn by Turn Navigation — If Equipped

When ON is selected the Turn-by-Turn directions will

appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a designated

turn within a programmed route. Press and release

the FUNCTION SELECT button when in this display

until “ON” or “OFF” appears to make your selection.

Automatically Move Seat Back on Exit

When ON is selected, the driver’s seat moves rearward 5

cm (2 inches) or to the farthest rearward position if this

distance is less than 5 cm (2 inches) when the key is

removed from the ignition switch so that the driver can

more easily exit the vehicle. The seat will return to the

memorized seat location (if Recall Memory with Remote

Key Unlock is set to ON) when the remote keyless entry

transmitter is used to unlock the door. Press and release

the FUNCTION SELECT button when in this display

until “ON” or “OFF” appears to make your selection.


SETTING THE ANALOG CLOCK

To set the analog clock at the top center of the instrument

panel, press and hold the button until the setting is

correct.

Analog Clock

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 151

SALES CODE RAK – AM/FM/CASSETTE/CD

(6-DISC) RADIO WITH OPTIONAL SATELLITE

RADIO, HANDS FREE PHONE, VIDEO, MP3, and

WMA CAPABILITIES

RAK Radio

Operating Instructions - Radio Mode

NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC

position to operate the radio.

4


152 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)

Press the ON/VOL control to turn the radio ON. Press

the ON/VOL a second time to turn OFF the radio.

Electronic Volume Control

The electronic volume control turns continuously (360

degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the

volume control to the right increases the volume and to

the left decreases it.

When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be

set at the same volume level as last played.

Mode Button (Radio Mode)

Press the mode button repeatedly to select between the

CD player, Cassette, Satellite, or Vehicle Entertainment

System (VES) (if equipped).

SEEK Button (Radio Mode)

Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next

station in either AM/FM or Satellite (if equipped) mode.

Press the right side of the button to seek up and the left

side to seek down. The radio will remained tuned to the

new station until you make another selection. Holding

the button and will bypass stations without stopping

until you release it.

SCAN Button (Radio Mode)

Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for

the next station, in either AM, FM or Satellite (if

equipped) frequencies, pausing for 5 seconds (satellite

scan 8 seconds) at each listenable station before continuing

to the next. To stop the search, press SCAN a second

time.

Time Button

Press the time button and the time of day will be

displayed for 5 seconds.

Clock Setting Procedure

1. Press and hold the time button until the hours blink.

2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune /

Audio control.

3. After the hours are adjusted, press the right side Tune

/ Audio control to set the minutes. The minutes will

begin to blink.


4. Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune / Audio

control.

5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait 5 seconds.

INFO Button (Radio Mode)

Press the INFO button for an RBDS station (one with call

letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text

message broadcast (if available) from an FM station (FM

mode only).

RW/FF (Radio Mode)

Pressing the rewind/fast forward button causes the tuner

to search for the next frequency in the direction of the

arrows. This feature operates in either AM, FM or Satellite

(if equipped) frequencies.

TUNE Control (Radio Mode)

Turn the right side rotary control to increase or decrease

the frequency.

AM/FM Button (Radio Mode)

Press the button to select AM or FM Modes.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 153

Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade

Press the rotary TUNE control and BASS will display.

Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or

decrease the Bass tones.

Press the rotary TUNE control a second time and MID

will display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to

increase or decrease the Mid Range tones.

Press the rotary TUNE control a third time and TREBLE

will display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to

increase or decrease the Treble tones.

Press the rotary TUNE control a fourth time and BAL will

display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to

adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers.

Press the rotary TUNE control a fifth time and FADE will

display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to

adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers.

Press the rotary TUNE control again to exit setting tone,

balance and fade.

4


154 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

RND/PTY Button (Radio Mode)

Pressing this button once will turn on the PTY mode for

5 seconds. If no action is taken during the 5 second time

out the PTY icon will turn off. Turning the tune knob

within 5 seconds will allow the program format type to

be selected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast

PTY information.

Turn the tune knob to select the following format types:

16 Digit-Character Dis-

Program Type

play

No program type or un-

None

defined

News News

Information Information

Sports Sports

Talk Talk

Rock Rock

Classic Rock Classic_Rock

Adult Hits Adult_Hits

Soft Rock Soft_Rock

Top 40 Top_40

Country Country

Oldies Oldies

Soft Soft

Nostalgia Nostalgia

Jazz Jazz

Classical Classical

Rhythm and Blues Rhythm_and_Blues

Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft_R_&_B

Foreign Language Foreign_Language

Religious Music Religious_Music

Religious Talk Religious_Talk

Personality Personality

Public Public

College

Unassigned

College

Weather Weather

By pressing the SEEK button when the PTY icon is

displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency

station with the same selected PTY name. The PTY

function only operates when in the FM mode.


If a preset button is activated while in the PTY (Program

Type) mode, the PTY mode will be exited and the radio

will tune to the preset station.

NOTE: If you have selected a PTY with the tune knob,

simply pressing the tune button in will go directly to a

“PTY seek”.

Buttons 1-6(Radio Mode)

These buttons tune the Radio to the stations that you

commit to push-button memory {12AM, 12 FM, and 12

Satellite (if equipped) stations}.

Operating Instructions — Tape Player

Insert the cassette with the exposed tape side toward the

left and the mechanical action of the player will gently

pull the cassette into the play position.

NOTE: When subjected to extremely cold temperatures,

the tape mechanism may require a few minutes to warm

up for proper operation. Sometimes poor playback may

be experienced due to a defective cassette tape. Clean and

demagnetize the tape heads at least twice a year.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 155

Seek Button

Press the SEEK button up for the next selection on the

tape and down to return to the beginning of the current

selection.

Press the SEEK button up or down to move the track

number to skip forward or backward 1 to 6 selections.

Press the SEEK button once to move 1 selection, twice to

move 2 selections, etc.

Fast Forward (FF)

Press the FF button up momentarily to advance the tape

in the direction that it is playing. The tape will advance

until the button is pressed again or the end of the tape is

reached. At the end of the tape, the tape will play in the

opposite direction.

Rewind (RW)

Press the RW button momentarily to reverse the tape

direction. The tape will reverse until the button is pressed

again or until the end of the tape is reached. At the end of

the tape, the tape will play in the opposite direction.

4


156 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Tape Eject

Press this button and the cassette will disengage

and eject from the radio.

Scan Button

Press this button to play 10 seconds of each selection.

Press the scan button a second time to cancel the feature.

Changing Tape Direction

If you wish to change the direction of tape travel (side

being played), press Preset 6. The lighted arrow in the

display window will show the new direction.

Metal Tape Selection

If a standard metal tape is inserted into the player, the

player will automatically select the correct equalization.

Pinch Roller Release

If ignition power or the radio ON/OFF switch are turned

off, the pinch roller will automatically retract to protect

the tape from any damage. When power is restored to the

tape player, the pinch roller will automatically reengage

and the tape will resume play.

Noise Reduction

The Dolby Noise Reduction System* is on whenever the

tape player is on, but may be switched off.

To turn off the Dolby Noise reduction System: Press

Preset 1 after you insert the tape. The NR light in the

display will go off when the Dolby System is off.

* ”Dolby” noise reduction manufactured under license

from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby

and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories

Licensing Corporation.

Operation Instructions - (CD MODE for CD Audio

Play)

NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC

position to operate the radio.

NOTE: Note: This Radio is capable of playing compact

discs (CD), recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable

compact discs (CD-RW) compact discs with MP3 tracks

and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks

and WMA.


Inserting Compact Disc(s)

CAUTION!

This CD player will accept 4 3/4 inch (12 cm) discs

only. The use of other sized discs may damage the

CD player mechanism.

You may eject a disc with the radio OFF.

If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio

ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and

begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will

show the disc number, the track number, and index time

in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of

track 1.

SEEK Button (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)

Press the right side of the SEEK button for the next

selection on the CD. Press the left side of the button to

return to the beginning of the current selection, or return

to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is

within the first 5 seconds of the current selection.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 157

SCAN Button (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)

Press the Scan button to scan through each track on the

CD currently playing.

LOAD/EJECT Button (CD Mode for CD Audio

Play)

LOAD/ EJECT - Load

Press the LOAD/ EJT button and the pushbutton

with the corresponding number where

the CD is being loaded. The radio will display

PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT

DISC. After the radio displays INSERT DISC insert the

CD into the player.

Radio display will show LOADING DISC when the disc

is loading, and “READING DISC” when the radio is

reading the disc.

LOAD / EJT - Eject

Press the LOAD/ EJT button and the pushbutton

with the corresponding number where

the CD was loaded and the disc will unload

and move to the entrance for easy removal.

4


158 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Radio display will show EJECTING DISC when the disc

is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc.

Press and hold the LOAD/ EJT button for 5 seconds and

all CDs will be ejected from the radio.

If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within

15 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,

the radio will continue to play the non-removed CD. If

the CD is removed and there are other CD’s in the radio,

the radio will play the next CD after a 2 minute timeout.

If the CD is removed and there are no other CD’s in the

radio, the radio will remain in CD mode and display

INSERT DISC” for 2 minutes. After 2 minutes the radio

will go to the previous tuner mode.

The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.

TIME Button (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)

Press this button to change the display from a large CD

playing time display to a small CD playing time display.

RW/FF (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)

Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will

begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or

another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button

works in a similar manner.

TUNE Control (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)

Pressing the TUNE control allows the setting of the Tone,

Fade, and Balance. See Radio Mode.

AM/FM Button (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)

Switches the Radio to the Radio mode.

RND/PTY Button (Random Play Button) (CD

MODE for CD Audio Play)

Press this button while the CD is playing to activate

Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the

compact disc in random order to provide an interesting

change of pace.

NOTE: MP3 and WMA Random Play are for file folders

only.

Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly

selected track.


Press and hold the FF button to fast forward through the

tracks. Release the FF button to stop the fast forward

feature. If the RW button is pressed, the current track will

reverse to the beginning of the track and begin playing.

Press the RND button a second time to stop Random

Play.

Buttons 1-6(CDMODE for CD Audio Play)

Selects disc positions 1-6forPlay/Load/Eject.

Notes On Playing MP3 Files

The radio can play MP3 files, however, acceptable MP3

file recording media and formats are limited. When

writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restrictions.

Supported Media (Disc Types)

The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are

CD-ROM, CD-R and CD-RW.

Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)

The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660

Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.

When reading discs recorded using formats other than

ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 159

files properly and may be unable to play the file normally.

UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.

The radio uses the following limits for file systems:

• Maximum number of directory levels: 15

• Maximum number of files: 255

• Maximum number of folders: 100

• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:

• Level 1: 12 (including a separator . and a

3-character extension)

• Level 2: 31 (including a separator . and a

3-character extension)

Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.

Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal

CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).

Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after

writing are most likely multisession discs. The use of

multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in

longer disc loading times.

4


160 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Supported MP3 File Formats

The radio will recognize only files with the *.mp3 extension

as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.mp3

extension may cause playback problems. The radio is

designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will

not play the file.

When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to

an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the

following table are supported. In addition, variable bit

rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files

use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or

VBR bit rates.

MPEG Specification

MPEG-1 Audio

Layer 3

MPEG-2 Audio

Layer 3

Sampling Frequency

(kHz)

48, 44.1, 32

24, 22.05, 16

Bit rate (kbps)

320, 256, 224,

192, 160, 128,

112, 96, 80, 64,

56, 48, 40, 32

160, 128, 144,

112, 96, 80, 64,

56, 48, 40, 32, 24,

16, 8

ID3 Tag information for artist, song title and album title

are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not

supported by the radios.

Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not

supported.

Playback of MP3 and WMA Files

When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the

radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium

contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more

time to start playing the MP3 files.

Loading times for playback of MP3 and WMA files may

be affected by the following:

• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than

CD-R media

• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer

to load than non-multisession discs

• Number of files and folders - Loading times will

increase with more files and folders


To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended

to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a

single-session disc, enable the Disc at Once option before

writing to the disc.

Operation Instructions - (CD Mode for MP3 and

WMA Audio Play)

SEEK Button (CD Mode for MP3 and WMA Play)

Pressing the right side of the SEEK button plays the next

file. Pressing the left side of the SEEK button plays the

beginning of the file. Pressing the button within the first

ten seconds plays the previous file.

LOAD/EJECT Button (CD Mode for MP3 and WMA

Play)

LOAD/ EJT - Load

Press the LOAD/ EJT button and the pushbutton

with the corresponding number where

the CD is being loaded. The radio will display

PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT

DISC. After the radio displays INSERT DISC insert the

CD into the player.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 161

The radio display will show LOADING DISC when the

disc is loading.

LOAD / EJT - Eject

Press the LOAD/ EJT button and the pushbutton

with the corresponding number where

the CD was loaded and the disc will unload

and move to the entrance for easy removal.

Radio display will show EJECTING DISC when the disc

is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc.

If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within

15 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,

the radio will continue to play the non-removed CD. If

the CD is removed and there are other CD’s in the radio,

the radio will play the next CD after a 2 minute timeout.

If the CD is removed and there are no other CD’s in the

radio, the radio will remain in CD mode and display

INSERT DISC” for 2 minutes. After 2 minutes the radio

will go to the previous tuner mode.

4


162 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)

Press and INFO button while playing MP3 or WMA disc.

The radio scrolls through the following TAG information:

Song Title, Artist, File Name, and Folder Name (if available).

Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed

time priority mode.

Press and hold the INFO button while in the message

display priority mode or elapsed time display priority

mode will display the song title for each file.

RW/FF (CD Mode for MP3 and WMA Play)

Press the FF side of the button to move forward through

the file or MP3 and WMA selection.

TUNE Control (CD Mode for MP3 Play)

Pressing the TUNE Control allows the adjustment of

Tone, Balance, and Fade.

AM/FM Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)

Switches back to Radio mode.

RND/ PTY Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)

Pressing this button plays files randomly.

SET/DIR Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)

Press the SET/DIR Button to display folders, when

playing an MP3 discs that have a file/folder structure.

Turn the TUNE control to display available folders or

move through available folders. Press the TUNE control

to select a folder.

Buttons 1-6(CDMode for MP3 Play)

Selects disc positions 1-6forPlay/Load/Eject.

Operating Instructions - Hands Free Phone (If

Equipped)

Refer to Hands Free Phone in Section 3 of the Owner’s

Manual.

Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio Mode (If

Equipped)

Refer to the Satellite Radio section of the Owner’s

Manual.


Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment

System (VES) (If Equipped)

Refer to separate Video Entertainment System (VES)

Guide.

SATELLITE RADIO — IF EQUIPPED

Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcasting

technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to

coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite

Radio. This service offers up to 100 channels of music,

sports, news, entertainment, and programming for children,

directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.

System Activation

To activate your Sirius Satellite Radio service, call the

toll-free number 888-539-7474, or visit the Sirius web site

at www.sirius.com. Please have the following information

available when activating your system:

1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification

Number (ESN/SID).

2. Credit card information.

3. Your Vehicle Identification Number.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 163

Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification

Number (ESN/SID)

The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification Number

is needed to activate your Sirius Satellite Radio

system. To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following

steps:

ESN/SID Access With REF Radios

With the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY position and

the radio OFF, press the CD Eject and Time buttons

simultaneously for 3 seconds. The first four digits of the

twelve-digit ESN/SID number will be displayed. Press

the SEEK UP button to display the next four digits.

Continue to press the SEEK UP button until all twelve

ESN/SID digits have been displayed. The SEEK DOWN

will page down until the first four digits are displayed.

The radio will exit the ESN/SID mode when any other

button is pushed, the ignition is turned OFF, or 5 minutes

has passed since any button was pushed.

ESN/SID Access With RAK Radio

With the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY position and

the radio OFF, press the CD Eject and TIME buttons

4


164 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

simultaneously for 3 seconds. All twelve ESN/SID numbers

will be displayed. The radio will exit the ESN/SID

mode when any other button is pushed, the ignition is

turned OFF, or 5 minutes has passed since any button

was pushed.

ESN/SID Access With Navigation Radios

Please refer to your Navigation User’s Manual.

Selecting Satellite Mode in REF and RAK Radio

Selecting Satellite Mode — REF Radio

Press the MODE button repeatedly until the word SAT

appears in the display.

A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio

mode.

Selecting Satellite Mode — RAK Radio

Press the MODE button repeatedly until the word SAT

appears in the display.

These radios will also display the current station name

and program type. For more information such as song

title and artist press the MSG or INFO button.

A CD or tape may remain in the radio while in the

Satellite radio mode.

Selecting a Channel

Press and release the SEEK or TUNE knob to search for

the next channel. Press the top of the button to search up

and the bottom of the button to search down. Holding the

TUNE button causes the radio to bypass channels until

the button is released.

Press and release the SCAN button (if equipped) to

automatically change channels every 7 seconds. The

radio will pause on each channel for 7 seconds before

moving on to the next channel. The word SCAN will

appear in the display between each channel change. Press

the SCAN button a second time to stop the search.

NOTE: Channels that may contain objectionable content

can be blocked. Contact Sirius Customer Care at

888-539-7474 to discuss options for channel blocking or

unblocking. Please have your ESN/SID information

available.


Storing and Selecting Pre-Set Channels

In addition to the 12 AM and 12 FM pre-set stations, you

may also commit 12 satellite stations to push button

memory. These satellite channel pre-set stations will not

erase any AM or FM pre-set memory stations. Follow the

memory pre-set procedures that apply to your radio.

Using the PTY (Program Type) Button (if

equipped)

Follow the PTY button instructions that apply to your

radio.

PTY Button SCAN

When the desired program type is obtained, press the

SCAN button within five seconds. The radio will play 7

seconds of the selected channel before moving to the next

channel of the selected program type. Press the SCAN

button a second time to stop the search.

NOTE: Pressing the SEEK or SCAN button while

performing a music type scan will change the channel by

one and stop the search. Pressing a pre-set memory

button during a music type scan, will call up the memory

channel and stop the search.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 165

PTY Button SEEK

When the desired program is obtained, press the SEEK

button within five seconds. The channel will change to

the next channel that matches the program type selected.

Satellite Antenna

To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the

roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects

placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause

decreased performance. Larger luggage items should be

placed as far forward as possible. Do not place items

directly on or above the antenna.

Reception Quality

Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the

following reasons.

• The vehicle is parked in an underground parking

structure or under a physical obstacle.

• Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the

form of short audio mutes.

• Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can

cause intermittent reception.

4


166 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can

cause signal blockage.

NAVIGATION SYSTEM (SALES CODE REC) — IF

EQUIPPED

Navigation Radio with CD Player and MP3 Capability

(REC) - combines a Global-Positioning System-based

navigation system with a color screen to provide maps,

turn identification, selection menus and instructions for

selecting a variety of destinations and routes. The unit

also provides an AM/FM stereo radio and six-disc CD

changer with MP3 capability.

Mapping information for navigation is supplied on a

DVD that is loaded into the unit. One map DVD covers

all of North America. Refer to your “Navigation User’s

Manual” for detailed operating instructions.

REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS

The remote sound system controls are located on the

surface of the steering wheel at the 3 and 9 o’clock

positions.

Some models feature an Electronic Vehicle Information

Center (EVIC) with driver-interactive display. This is

located in the upper part of the instrument cluster

between the speedometer and tachometer. The audio

mode of the EVIC can display any one of twelve radio

station preset frequencies, CD disc number, CD track

number, tape, or one of 200 Satellite radio channels

depending on which radio is in the vehicle.


Electronic Vehicle Information Center

The VOLUME switch controls the volume of

the sound system. Pressing the top of the

rocker switch will increase the volume and

pressing the bottom of the rocker switch will

decrease the volume.

The AUDIO MODE SELECT button changes

the mode of the radio from AM to FM to Tape

to CD, or to Satellite (SAT) depending on

which radio is in the vehicle.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 167

The FUNCTION SELECT button advances the

radio to the next preset, changes the tape side

being played, or changes the current disc when

used in audio mode.

The SCROLL buttons change selections such as

radio station, CD track, or satellite radio channel

depending on the current mode.

The following describes the operation of the SCROLL

buttons in each mode:

Radio Operation

Pressing the top of the switch will SEEK up for the next

listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch

will SEEK down for the next listenable station.

Tape Player

Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next

selection on the cassette. Pressing the bottom of the

switch once will go to the beginning of the current

selection or to the beginning of the previous selection if it

is within the first 5 seconds of the current selection.

4


168 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the

second selection, three times, it will play the third, etc.

Press the FUNCTION SELECT button to switch the side

of the tape to be played.

CD Player

Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next

track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once

will go to the beginning of the current track or to the

beginning of the previous track if it is within one second

after the current track begins to play.

If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the

second track, three times, it will play the third, etc.

Satellite

Pressing the top of the switch will SEEK up for the next

listenable satellite channel and pressing the bottom of the

switch will SEEK down for the next listenable satellite

channel.

RADIO GENERAL INFORMATION

Radio Broadcast Signals

Your new radio will provide excellent reception under

most operating conditions. Like any system, however, car

radios have performance limitations, due to mobile operation

and natural phenomena, which might lead you to

believe your sound system is malfunctioning. To help

you understand and save you concern about these “apparent”

malfunctions, you must understand a point or

two about the transmission and reception of radio signals.

Two Types of Signals

There are two basic types of radio signals... AM or

Amplitude Modulation, in which the transmitted sound

causes the amplitude, or height, of the radio waves to

vary... and FM or Frequency Modulation, in which the

frequency of the wave is varied to carry the sound.


Electrical Disturbances

Radio waves may pick up electrical disturbances during

transmission. They mainly affect the wave amplitude,

and thus remain a part of the AM reception. They

interfere very little with the frequency variations that

carry the FM signal.

AM Reception

AM sound is based on wave amplitude, so AM reception

can be disrupted by such things as lightning, power lines

and neon signs.

FM Reception

Because FM transmission is based on frequency variations,

interference that consists of amplitude variations

can be filtered out, leaving the reception relatively clear,

which is the major feature of FM radio.

NOTE: On vehicles so equipped the radio, steering

wheel radio controls and 6 disc CD/DVD changer if

equipped, will remain active for 10 minutes after the

ignition has been turned off, and the driver door has not

been opened. This feature is programmable through the

electronic vehicle information center (EVIC) — if

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 169

equipped. Refer to “Delay Power Off to Accessories Until

Exit” under “Personal Settings” in the Electronic Vehicle

Information Center section for details.

CASSETTE TAPE AND PLAYER MAINTENANCE

To keep the cassette tapes and player in good condition,

take the following precautions:

1. Do not use cassette tapes longer than C-90; otherwise,

sound quality and tape durability will be greatly diminished.

2. Keep the cassette tape in its case to protect from

slackness and dust when it is not in use.

3. Keep the cassette tape away from direct sunlight, heat

and magnetic fields such as the radio speakers.

4. Before inserting a tape, make sure that the label is

adhering flatly to the cassette.

5. A loose tape should be corrected before use. To rewind

a loose tape, insert the eraser end of a pencil into the tape

drive gear and twist the pencil in the required directions.

4


170 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Maintain your cassette tape player. The head and capstan

shaft in the cassette player can pick up dirt or tape

deposits each time a cassette is played. The result of

deposits on the capstan shaft may cause the tape to wrap

around and become lodged in the tape transport. The

other adverse condition is low or “muddy” sound from

one or both channels, as if the treble tone control were

turned all the way down. To prevent this, you should

periodically clean the head with a commercially available

WET cleaning cassette.

As preventive maintenance, clean the head about every

30 hours of use. If you wait until the head becomes very

dirty (noticeably poor sound), it may not be possible to

remove all deposits with a simple WET cleaning cassette.

CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE

To keep the CD/DVD discs in good condition, take the

following precautions:

1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the

surface.

2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,

wiping from center to edge.

3. Do not apply paper, paper CD labels, or tape to the

disc; avoid scratching the disc.

4. Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner, cleaners,

or antistatic sprays.

5. Store the disc in its case after playing.

6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.

7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become

too high.


RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES

Under certain conditions, the cellular phone being On in

your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from

your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated

by relocating the cellular phone antenna. This condition

is not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance

does not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the

antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be

turned down or off during cellular phone operation.

CLIMATE CONTROLS

Automatic Temperature Control

The Infrared Dual-Zone Climate Control System automatically

maintains the interior comfort level desired by

the driver and passenger. This is accomplished by a dual

sun-sensor in the top of the instrument panel, and an

infrared sensor located in the face of the control unit.

There are also various sensors monitored by this system

which take account for vehicle speed, A/C pressure,

outside temperature, and engine cooling temperature.

The infrared sensor independently measures the surface

temperature of the driver and passenger. Based on the

sensor input, the system automatically adjusts the air

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 171

flow temperature, the air flow volume, and amount of

outside air recirculation. This maintains a comfortable

temperature even under changing conditions.

Automatic Temperature Controls

Operation of the system is quite simple. Begin by turning

the right mode knob to AUTO, and place the blower

control (left knob) to either LO AUTO or HI AUTO. The

LO AUTO position should be used for front seat occupants

only. The HI AUTO position should be used when

more air flow is desired, or when rear seat occupants are

present. Dial in the temperature you would like the

4


172 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

system to maintain by rotating the driver’s or passenger’s

control knob. Once the comfort level is selected the

system will maintain that level automatically using the

heating system. Should the desired comfort level require

air conditioning, the system will automatically make the

adjustment.

You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply

allowing the system to function automatically. Selecting

the OFF position on the fan control stops the system

completely and closes the outside air intake.

72°F (22°C) is the recommended setting for maximum

comfort for the average person, however, this may vary.

NOTE: The temperature setting can be adjusted at any

time without affecting automatic control operation.

The air conditioning in this system is automatic.

Pressing this button while in AUTO mode will

cause an audible beep and the LED will flash three

times and remain off. This indicates that the system is in

AUTO and requesting the air conditioning is not necessary.

The system will automatically control recirculation.

However, pressing this button will temporarily

put the system in recirculation mode

(ten minutes). This can be used when outside

conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity

are present. This will cause an audible beep, and the LED

will illuminate. After ten minutes the system will return

to normal AUTO mode function and the LED will turn

off.

NOTE:

• The surface of the climate control panel, and the top

center of the instrument panel should be kept free of

debris due to the climate control sensor’s location.

Mud on the windshield may also cause poor operation

of this system.

• To provide you with maximum comfort in the automatic

mode, during cold start-ups the blower fan will

remain off until the engine warms up. However, the

fan will engage immediately if the defrost mode is

selected or if you manually select a blower speed.


• Under certain conditions (after the vehicle is turned

off) the climate control system may recalibrate and a

noise may be heard for 20 seconds. This is part of

normal operation.

• Most of the time, when in Automatic operation, you

can temporarily put the system into recirculation

mode by pressing the Recirc button. However, under

certain conditions in automatic the system is blowing

air out of the defrost vents. When these conditions are

present and the Recirc button is pressed the indicator

will flash and remain off. This tells you that you are

unable to go into recirculation mode at this time. If you

would like to go to Recirculation mode, you must first

move your mode knob to panel, panel/floor or floor,

then hit the recirc button. This feature will reduce the

possibility of window fogging.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 173

Manual Operation

This system offers a full complement of manual override

features which consist of Blower Preferred Automatic,

Mode Preferred Automatic, or Blower and Mode Preferred

Automatic. This means the customer can override

the blower, the mode, or both. There is a manual blower

range used when the AUTO setting is not desired. The

left control can be set to any fixed blower speed by

rotating the knob.

NOTE: Please read the Automatic Temperature Control

Operation Chart below for details.

4


174 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL


The operator can override the AUTO mode setting and

select the direction of the air by rotating the right mode

knob to one of the following positions.

• Defrost

Air is directed to the windshield through the

outlets at the base of the windshield. Air is

also directed to the front door windows through the

side window demister grilles.

• Defrost/Floor

Air flows through the front and rear floor

outlets and the outlets at the base of the

windshield. Air is also directed to the front

door windows through the side window demister

grilles.

• Floor

Air flows through the floor outlets located

under the instrument panel and into the rear

seating area through vents under the front seats.

• Bi-Level

Air flows both through the outlets located in

the instrument panel and those located on the

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 175

floor. Air flows through the registers in the back of

the center console to the rear seat passengers. These

registers can be closed to block airflow.

• Panel

Air flows through the outlets located in the

instrument panel. Air flows through the registers

in the back of the center console to the rear seat

passengers. These registers can be closed to block

airflow.

Depress this button to turn on and off the air

conditioning during manual operation only. Conditioned

outside air is then directed through the

outlets selected on the mode control dial. The button

includes an LED that illuminates when manual operation

is selected, and will cause an audible beep.

NOTE: To manually control the air conditioning the

mode selector must be moved out of the AUTO position.

Press this button to turn on the rear window

defroster and the heated side mirrors (if

equipped). An LED in the button will illuminate and an

audible beep indicates that the rear window defroster is

4


176 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

ON. The defroster automatically turns off after approximately

10 minutes of operation for the first push of the

button, and will turn off after approximately 5 minutes

for the second push of the button.

CAUTION!

To avoid damaging the electrical conductors of the

rear window defroster, do not use scrapers, sharp

instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the

interior surface of the window.

Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm

water.

This button can be used to block out smoke,

odors, dust, high humidity, or if rapid cooling

is desired. The recirculation mode should only

be used temporarily. The button includes an

LED that illuminates, and an audible beep indicates that

the recirculation mode is active. You may use this feature

separately.

NOTE: Extended use of recirculation may cause the

windows to fog. If the interior of the windows begins to

fog, press the “Recirculate” icon button to return to

outside air. Some temp./humidity conditions will cause

captured interior air to condense on windows and hamper

visibility. For this reason, the system will not allow

“Recirculate” to be selected while in the defrost or

defrost/floor modes. Attempting to use the recirculation

while in these modes will cause the LED in the button to

blink and then turn off.

Summer Operation

The engine cooling system in air conditioned vehicles

must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze coolant

to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect

against engine overheating. A 50% solution of ethylene

glycol antifreeze coolant in water is recommended. Refer

to section 7, Maintenance Procedures, of this manual for

proper coolant selection.


Winter Operation

Use of the air Recirculation mode during winter months

is not recommended because it may cause window

fogging.

NOTE: See Operating Tips chart (for Manual A/C

Control) at the end of this section for suggested control

settings in different weather conditions.

Vacation Storage

Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service

(i.e. vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning

system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh

air and high blower setting. This will insure adequate

system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor

damage when the system is started again.

Window Fogging

Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed

by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The

Defrost/Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear

windshield and provide sufficient heating. If side window

fogging becomes a problem increase blower speed.

Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but

rainy or humid weather.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 177

NOTE: Recirculate without A/C should not be used for

long periods as fogging may occur.

Outside Air Intake

Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the

windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves

collected in the air intake may reduce airflow and if they

enter the plenum they could plug the water drains. In

winter months make sure the air intake is clear of ice,

slush and snow.

A/C Air Filter — If Equipped

The climate control system filters outside air containing

dust, pollen and some odors. Strong odors cannot be

totally filtered out. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in

your Owner’s Manual for filter replacement instructions.

4


178 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Operating Tips


CONTENTS

Starting Procedures ....................181

▫ Normal Starting ......................181

Transmission Shifting ...................183

▫ 5 Speed Automatic Transmission ..........183

▫ Automatic Transmission —

General Information ...................188

AutoStick ............................190

▫ AutoStick Operation ...................190

▫ AutoStick General Information ............191

Parking Brake .........................191

Brake System .........................193

▫ Anti-Lock Brake System ................193

STARTING AND OPERATING

Power Steering ........................196

Tire Safety Information ..................197

▫ Tire Markings ........................197

▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN) ..........200

▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure ...........201

Tires—General Information ...............205

▫ Tire Pressure .........................205

▫ Tire Inflation Pressures .................206

▫ Radial-Ply Tires ......................208

▫ Tire Spinning ........................208

▫ Tread Wear Indicators ..................209

5


180 STARTING AND OPERATING

▫ Replacement Tires .....................209

▫ Alignment And Balance .................210

Tire Chains ...........................211

Snow Tires ...........................212

Tire Rotation Recommendations ...........212

▫ Tire Rotation — Standard Tires ............213

▫ Tire Rotation — All Season Tires ..........213

▫ Tire Rotation — General Information .......213

Ground Clearance .....................214

Fuel Requirements .....................214

▫ Spark Knock .........................214

▫ Reformulated Gasoline .................215

▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ..............215

▫ MMT In Gasoline .....................215

▫ Materials Added To Fuel ................216

▫ Fuel System Cautions ..................216

▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings ..............217

Adding Fuel ..........................218

▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) ...............218

Vehicle Loading .......................219

▫ Vehicle Certification Label ...............219

▫ Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) .......220

▫ Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) .........220

▫ Overloading .........................220

▫ Loading ............................220

Recreational Towing

(Behind Motorhome, Etc.) ................222

▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle

(Flat Towing With All Four Wheels On The

Ground) ............................222


STARTING PROCEDURES

CAUTION!

Long periods of engine idling, especially at high

engine speeds, can cause excessive exhaust temperatures

which can damage your vehicle. Do not leave

your vehicle unattended with the engine running.

WARNING!

Do not leave animals or children inside parked

vehicles in hot weather; interior heat build up may

cause serious injury or death.

The gear selector must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK

position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes

before shifting into any driving gear.

STARTING AND OPERATING 181

Normal Starting

Normal Starting of either a cold or a warm engine is

obtained without pumping or depressing the accelerator

pedal. Turn the key to the “START” position and release

when the engine starts. If the engine has not started

within 3 seconds, slightly depress the accelerator pedal

while continuing to crank. If the engine fails to start

within 15 seconds, turn the key to the “OFF” position,

wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the normal starting

procedure.

Extremely Cold Weather (below 20°F or 29°C) To

insure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of an

externally powered electric engine block heater (available

from your dealer) is recommended.

5


182 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING!

• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get

it started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic

transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned

fuel could enter the catalytic converter and

once the engine has started, ignite and damage the

converter and vehicle. If the vehicle has a discharged

battery, booster cables may be used to

obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery

in another vehicle. This type of start can be

dangerous if done improperly. See section 6 of

this manual for the proper jump starting procedures

and follow them carefully.

• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into

the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to

start the vehicle. This could result in flash fire

causing serious personal injury.

If Engine Fails to Start

If the engine fails to start after you have followed the

“NORMAL STARTING” procedure, it may be flooded.

Push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and

hold it there while cranking the engine. This should clear

any excess fuel in case the engine is flooded.

CAUTION!

To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the

engine for more than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to

15 seconds before trying again.

If the engine has been flooded, it may start to run, but not

have enough power to continue running when the key is

released. If this occurs, continue cranking up to 15

seconds with the accelerator pedal pushed all the way to

the floor. Release the accelerator pedal and the key once

the engine is running smoothly. Do not overspeed engine.

If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15

second periods of cranking with the accelerator pedal

held to the floor, the “NORMAL STARTING” procedure

should be repeated.


After Starting

The idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine

warms up.

TRANSMISSION SHIFTING

5 Speed Automatic Transmission

Gear Selector

STARTING AND OPERATING 183

WARNING!

Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure

those in and near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,

you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is

running. Before exiting a vehicle you should shift

the transmission into Park, remove the key from the

ignition, and apply the park brake. Once the key is

removed from the ignition the transmission shift

lever is locked in the Park position, securing the

vehicle against unwanted movement. Furthermore,

you should never leave children unattended inside a

vehicle. The following indicators should be used to

ensure that you have engaged the transmission shift

lever into the “Park” position:

• When shifting into Park move the lever all the

way forward until it stops, and is fully seated.

• Look at the shift indicator window on the console

to ensure it is in the “P” position.

5


184 STARTING AND OPERATING

Park Position

The PARK position is to be used when parking the

vehicle. Engage only with the vehicle stopped. The PARK

position is not intended to serve as a brake when the

vehicle is parked. Rather, the driver should always use

the parking brake in addition to placing the selector lever

in PARK to secure the vehicle.

PARK supplements the parking brake by locking the

transmission. The engine can be started in this range.

Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in

motion.

NOTE:

• If the key is in the ACC or ON position, you must press

the brake pedal to shift out of the PARK position.

• The key can be removed from the ignition switch only

with the selector lever in the PARK position. With the

key removed, the selector lever is locked in the PARK

position.

For electrical system malfunctions there is an override for

the interlock system. In order to override this system the

key must be in the ignition with the switch in the ACC or

ON positions. Remove the rubber storage tray from the

bin located to the right of the shifter lever. The override

can be activated by pressing the pink-colored tab, which

can be accessed through a hole inside the bin. While the

override is pressed, the shifter can be moved out of the

park position without pressing the brake. After operation

return rubber storage tray to its original position.

Brake Interlock Override

Reverse

Shift into REVERSE gear only when the vehicle is completely

stopped.


Neutral

No power is transmitted from the engine to the drive

axle. When the brakes are released, the vehicle can be

moved freely (pushed or towed). Do not engage in

NEUTRAL position while driving except to coast when

the vehicle is in danger of skidding (e.g., on icy roads).

The engine may be started in this range. Use this range

for starting your vehicle if it is moving or being towed.

CAUTION!

Coasting the vehicle, or driving for any other reason

with selector lever in NEUTRAL can result in transmission

damage.

Drive

This range should be used for most city and highway

driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts

and best fuel economy.

STARTING AND OPERATING 185

The transmission automatically upshifts through fifth

gear. The DRIVE position provides optimum driving

characteristics under all normal operating conditions.

When frequent transmission shifting occurs when using

the Overdrive range, such as when operating the vehicle

under heavy loading conditions (in hilly terrain, traveling

into strong head winds, or while towing heavy

trailers, use the AutoStick mode and select the “3” range.

AutoStick Gear selection

The transmission gear can be selected by pressing the

selector lever to the right or the left with the selector lever

in the DRIVE position. The gear currently selected is

indicated in the instrument cluster display. Briefly press

selector lever in the “D -” direction. The transmission will

shift from the current gear to the next lower gear. Shifting

into another gear that allows for quicker acceleration or

to slow the vehicle down is possible. Downshifts can also

be performed.

Press and hold the selector lever in the “D-” direction.

The transmission will shift from the current gear directly

to the best gear for acceleration.

5


186 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE: To avoid overrevving the engine when the

selector lever is moved in “D -” direction, the transmission

will not shift to a lower gear if the engine’s revolutions

per minute limit would be exceeded.

Briefly press the selector lever in the “D +” direction. The

transmission will shift from the current gear to the next

higher gear.

Press and hold the selector lever in the “D +” direction.

The transmission will shift from the current gear directly

to gear “D”.

WARNING!

On slippery road surfaces, never downshift in order

to obtain braking action. This could result in drive

wheel slip and reduced vehicle control. Your vehicle’s

ABS will not prevent this type of loss of control.

You could lose control of your vehicle and have an

accident.

Delayed Shifts in Cold Temperatures

During cold temperature operation you may notice delayed

upshifts depending on engine and transmission

temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature improves

warm up time of the engine and transmission to

achieve maximum efficiency.

Temporary Transmission Limp Home Mode

The transmission is monitored for abnormal conditions.

If a condition is detected that could result in transmission

damage, the transmission will engage Limp Home Mode.

If vehicle acceleration worsens, or the transmission no

longer shifts, the transmission is most likely operating in

the Limp Home Mode. In this mode, the transmission

will remain in the current gear until the vehicle is

brought to a stop. After the vehicle has stopped,

PARK(P), REVERSE(R), and NEUTRAL(N) will continue

to operate. SECOND gear will operate in the DRIVE(D)

shifter position. The Malfunction Indicator Lamp may be

illuminated.

A reset feature is available to allow the vehicle to be

driven to a dealer for service. To reset the transmission,

use the following procedure:


1. Stop the vehicle.

2. Move the selector lever to the PARK position.

3. Turn off the engine.

4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.

5. Restart the engine.

6. Move the shift lever to the desired range. If the

problem is no longer detected, the transmission will

return to normal operation.

NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we

recommend that you visit a dealer at your earliest

possible convenience. Your dealer has diagnostic equipment

to determine if the problem could recur.

STARTING AND OPERATING 187

Have the transmission checked at your authorized dealer

as soon as possible.

If the problem has been momentary, the transmission can

be reset to regain all forward gears.

Permanent Transmission Limp Home Mode

Permanent Limp Home Mode will be activated if the

transmission enters temporary Limp Home Mode three

times. Follow the reset procedure described in the previous

section. In Permanent Limp Home Mode, PARK(P),

REVERSE(R) and NEUTRAL(N) will continue to operate.

SECOND gear will operate in the DRIVE(D) shifter

position. The malfunction indicator lamp may illuminate.

5


188 STARTING AND OPERATING

Automatic Transmission — General Information

CAUTION!

Damage to the transmission may occur if the following

precautions are not observed:

• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to

a complete stop.

• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the

vehicle has come to a complete stop and the

engine is at idle speed.

• Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK or NEUTRAL

into any forward gear when the engine is above

idle speed.

• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot

is firmly on the brake pedal.

The automatic transmission selects individual gears automatically,

dependent upon:

• Altitude

• Vehicle Loading

• Driving Style

• Selector lever position

• Accelerator position

• Vehicle speed

The gear shifting process is continuously adapted, dependent

on the driving style, the driving situation and

the road characteristics.

NOTE:

• After selecting any driving position, wait a moment to

allow the gear to fully engage before accelerating,

especially when the engine is cold.

• If there is a need to restart your engine be sure to cycle

the key to the LOCK position before restarting. Transmission

engagement may be delayed up to 10 seconds

after restart if the key is not cycled to the LOCK

position first.

• The electronically controlled transmission provides a

precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are


self-calibrating. Therefore, the first few shifts on a new

vehicle may be somewhat abrupt or soft until after the

break-in period. This is a normal condition, and precision

shifts will develop within a few shift cycles.

WARNING!

It is dangerous to shift the selector lever out of PARK

or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle

speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal,

the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in

reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit

someone or something. Only shift into gear when

the engine is idling normally and when your foot is

firmly on the brake pedal.

The selector lever is automatically locked while in the

PARK position. To move the selector lever out of the

PARK position, the brake pedal must be firmly depressed

before the shift lock will release.

Shift the selector lever to the desired position only when

the engine is idling normally and the brake pedal is

STARTING AND OPERATING 189

applied. Do not release the brake until ready to drive. The

vehicle may otherwise accelerate quickly when the selector

lever is in DRIVE or REVERSE position.

Stopping

For brief stops, leave the transmission in gear and hold

the vehicle with the brake pedal. For longer stops with

the engine idling, shift into the NEUTRAL or PARK

position and hold the vehicle with the parking brake.

When stopping the vehicle uphill, do not hold it with the

accelerator; use the brake. This avoids unnecessary transmission

heat build-up.

Maneuvering

To maneuver in tight areas, control the vehicle speed by

gradually releasing the brakes. Accelerate gently and

never abruptly step on the accelerator.

To rock a vehicle out of soft ground (mud or snow),

alternately shift from forward to reverse, while applying

only slight acceleration. Rocking a vehicle free in this

manner may cause the ABS or traction system malfunction

indicator light to come on. Turn off the engine and

restart the engine to clear the malfunction indication.

5


190 STARTING AND OPERATING

Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System

This vehicle is equipped with a brake transmission shift

interlock system (BTSI) that holds the gearshift lever in

the P (Park) position when the ignition switch is in the

LOCK position. To move the gear selector lever out of the

P (Park) position, the ignition switch must be turned to

the ON position, and the brake pedal must be depressed.

Over Temperature Mode

The transmission electronics constantly monitor the

transmission oil temperature. If the transmission exceeds

normal operating temperature, the transmission will

change the way it shifts to help control the condition.

This may result in a slightly different feeling or response

during normal operation in D (Drive) position. After the

transmission cools down, it will return to normal operation.

AUTOSTICK

Autostick is a driver-interactive transmission that offers

manual gear shifting capability to provide the driver

with more control. Autostick allows the driver to increase

engine braking ability, eliminate undesirable upshifts

and downshifts, and improve overall vehicle performance.

This system can also provide the driver with

more control during passing, city driving, mountain

driving, trailer towing, and many other situations.

Autostick Operation

By placing the shift lever in the DRIVE position the lever

can be moved from side to side. This allows the driver to

select a specific gear. Move the shift lever to the Left (-) to

trigger a downshift and to the Right (+) to trigger an

upshift. The gear position will be shown in the transmission

gear display located in the instrument cluster.

NOTE: In the autostick mode the transmission will only

shift up and down when Left or Right (D-/D+) is

manually selected by the driver.

Shifting into or out of the autostick mode can be done at

any time without taking your foot off the accelerator


pedal. When the driver wishes to engage autostick,

simply move the shift lever to the Left or Right(D-/D+)

position while in DRIVE.

Hold the shift lever to the right for at least one second to

disengage autostick. The transmission will now operate

automatically; shifting between the five available gears.

Autostick General Information

• You can start out in first or second gear. The system will

ignore attempts to upshift at too low of a vehicle speed.

• The transmission will automatically downshift to first

gear when coming to a stop.

• Starting out in second gear is helpful in snowy or icy

conditions.

• Avoid using speed control when autostick is engaged.

• The transmission will not automatically shift up when

maximum engine speed is reached while autostick is

engaged.

• Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when

autostick is engaged.

STARTING AND OPERATING 191

PARKING BRAKE

When the parking brake is applied with the ignition

switch on, the brake light in the instrument cluster will

turn on.

NOTE: This light only shows that the parking brake is

applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.

Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking

brake is fully applied and place the gear selector in the

Park position.

Parking Brake

5


192 STARTING AND OPERATING

To release the parking brake, pull out on the parking

brake release located on the left side of the instrument

panel.

Parking Brake Release

When parking on a hill, it is important to set the parking

brake before placing the gear selector in Park, otherwise

the load on the transmission locking mechanism may

make it difficult to move the selector out of park. As an

added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb

on a downhill grade and away from the curb on a uphill

grade.

The parking brake should always be applied when the

driver is not in the vehicle.

WARNING!

• Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous

for a number of reasons. A child or others

could be injured. Children should be warned not

to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the

gear selector lever. Don’t leave the keys in the

ignition. A child could operate power windows,

other controls, or move the vehicle.

• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged

before driving: failure to do so can lead to brake

failure, and an accident.


BRAKE SYSTEM

In the event power assist is lost for any reason (for

example, repeated brake applications with the engine

off), the brakes will still function. The effort required to

brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required

with the power system operating.

Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic

brake systems. If either of the two hydraulic

systems lose normal capability, the remaining

system will still function. There will be some

loss of overall braking effectiveness. This may be evident

by increased pedal travel during application, greater

pedal force required to slow or stop, and potential

activation of the Brake Warning Lamp.

Anti-Lock Brake System

The Anti-Lock Brake System provides increased vehicle

stability and brake performance under most braking

conditions. The system automatically “pumps” the

brakes during severe braking conditions to prevent

wheel lock-up.

STARTING AND OPERATING 193

The electronic brake force distribution (EBD) prevents the

rear wheels from over-braking and provides greater

control of available braking forces applied to the rear

axle.

WARNING!

Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish

their effectiveness and may lead to an accident.

Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just

press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to

slow down or stop.

5


194 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING!

• Anti-lock system (ABS) cannot prevent the natural

laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor

can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond

that afforded by the condition of the vehicle

brakes and tires or the traction afforded.

• The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including

those resulting from excessive speed in turns,

following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.

Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver

can prevent accidents.

• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must

never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous

manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety

or the safety of others.

The ABS light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System.

The light will come on when the ignition

switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for

as long as four seconds.

If the ABS light remains on or comes on while driving, it

indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system

is not functioning and that service is required. However,

the conventional brake system will continue to operate

normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.

If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced

as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock

brakes. If the ABS light does not come on when the

Ignition switch is turned to the ON position, have the

bulb repaired as soon as possible.

If both the Brake Warning Light and the ABS Light

remain on, the Anti-Lock brakes (ABS) and Electronic

Brake Force Distribution (EBD) systems are not functioning.

Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.

When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph (11 km/h), you

may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some

related motor noises. These noises are the system performing

its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS system

is working properly. This self check occurs each time the

vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph (11 km/h).


ABS is activated during braking under certain road or

stopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can include

ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose

debris, or panic stops.

You also may experience the following when the brake

system goes into Anti-lock:

• The ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a

short time after the stop),

• the clicking sound of solenoid valves,

• brake pedal pulsations,

• and a slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the

end of the stop.

These are all normal characteristics of ABS.

STARTING AND OPERATING 195

WARNING!

The Anti-Lock Brake System contains sophisticated

electronic equipment that may be susceptible to

interference caused by improperly installed or high

output radio transmitting equipment. This interference

can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking

capability. Installation of such equipment should be

performed by qualified professionals.

All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and

type and tires must be properly inflated to produce

accurate signals for the computer.

5


196 STARTING AND OPERATING

POWER STEERING

The standard power steering system will give you good

vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability

in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical

steering capability if power assist is lost.

If for some reason, the power assist is interrupted, it will

still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these conditions

you will observe a substantial increase in steering

effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during

parking maneuvers.

NOTE: Increased noise levels at the end of the steering

wheel travel are considered normal and does not indicate

that there is a problem with the power steering system.

WARNING!

Continued operation with reduced power steering

assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.

Service should be obtained as soon as possible.

CAUTION!

Prolong operation of the steering system at the end

of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering

fluid temperature and should be avoided when

possible. Damage to the power steering pump may

occur.


TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION

Tire Markings

NOTE:

• P(Passenger)-Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design

standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P” molded

into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example:

P215/65R15 95H.

STARTING AND OPERATING 197

• European Metric tire sizing is based on European

design standards. Tires designed to this standard have

the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with

the section width. The letter P is absent from this tire

size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H

• LT(Light Truck)-Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.

design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric

tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the

letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding

the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.

• Temporary Spare tires are high pressure compact

spares designed for temporary emergency use only.

Tires designed to this standard have the letter “T”

molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation.

Example: T145/80D18 103M.

• High Flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design

standards and begins with the tire diameter molded

into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.

5


198 STARTING AND OPERATING

Tire Sizing Chart

EXAMPLE:

Size Designation:

P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards

....blank.... = Passenger car tire based on European design standards

LT = Light Truck tire based on U.S. design standards

T = Temporary Spare tire

31 = Overall Diameter in Inches (in)

215 = Section Width in Milimeters (mm)

65 = Aspect Ratio in Percent (%)

—Ratio of section height to section width of tire.

10.5 = Section Width in Inches (in)

R = Construction Code

—R means Radial Construction.

—D means Diagonal or Bias Construction.

15 = Rim Diameter in Inches (in)


STARTING AND OPERATING 199

EXAMPLE:

Service Description:

95 = Load Index

—A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry.

H = Speed Symbol

—A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding

to its load index under certain operating conditions.

—The maximum speed corresponding to the Speed Symbol should only be achieved under

specified operating conditions. (ie. tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions and

posted speed limits).

Load Identification:

....blank.... = Absence of any text on sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) Tire

Extra Load (XL) = Extra Load (or Reinforced) Tire

Light Load = Light Load Tire

C,D,E = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure

Maximum Load — Maximum Load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry.

Maximum Pressure — Maximum Pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this

tire.

5


200 STARTING AND OPERATING

Tire Identification Number (TIN)

The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire

however the date code may only be on one side. Tires

with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including

date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire.

Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall

tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on

the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard side

of the tire.

EXAMPLE:

DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301

DOT = Department of Transportation

—This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire

safety standards, and is approved for highway use.

MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location.(2 digits)

L9 = Code representing the tire size.(2 digits)

ABCD = Code used by tire manufacturer.(1 to 4 digits)

03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured.(2 digits)

—03 means the 3rd week.

01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured.(2 digits)

—01 means the year 2001.

—Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have 1 number to represent the year in

which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991.


Tire Loading and Tire Pressure

Tire Placard Location

NOTE: Some vehicles have a “Tire and Loading Information”

placard located on the driver’s side “B” pillar.

Tire Placard Location

STARTING AND OPERATING 201

Tire and Loading Information Placard

Tire and Loading Information

This placard tells you important information about

the,

1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle

2) the total weight your vehicle can carry

3) the tire size designed for your vehicle

4) the cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear

and spare tires.

5


202 STARTING AND OPERATING

Loading

The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed

the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You

will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you

adhere to the loading conditions, tire size and cold tire

inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading

Information placard and the Vehicle Loading section of

this manual.

NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,

gross axle weight ratings (GAWR’s) for the front and rear

axles must not be exceeded. For further information on

GAWR’s, vehicle loading and trailer towing, see the

Vehicle Loading section of this manual.

To determine the maximum loading conditions of your

vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of

occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX

lbs.” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The

combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and

trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed

the weight referenced here.

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit

1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants

and cargo should never exceed XXX pounds” on

your vehicle’s placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and

passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers

from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.

4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of

cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”

amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb.

passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo

and luggage load capacity is 650 lb. (1400–750 (5 x 150) =

650 lb.)

5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo

being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely

exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity

calculated in step 4.


6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your

trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this

manual to determine how this reduces the available

cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

NOTE: The following table shows examples on how to

calculate total load, cargo/luggage and towing capacities

of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and

STARTING AND OPERATING 203

number and size of occupants. This table is for illustration

purposes only and may not be accurate for the

seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.

NOTE: For the following example the combined weight

of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs. (392

Kg).

5


204 STARTING AND OPERATING


WARNING!

Overloading of your tire is dangerous. Overloading

can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and

increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the

recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never

overload them.

TIRES—GENERAL INFORMATION

Tire Pressure

Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and

satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary

areas are affected by improper tire pressure:

1. Safety—

STARTING AND OPERATING 205

WARNING!

Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can

cause accidents.

• Under inflation increases tire flexing and can

result in tire failure.

• Over inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion

shock. Objects on the road and chuck holes can cause

damage that results in tire failure.

• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems.

You could lose control of your vehicle.

• Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect

vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in

loss of vehicle control.

• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle

to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right

or left.

Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended

cold tire inflation pressure.

5


206 STARTING AND OPERATING

2. Economy—

Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear

patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal

wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for

earlier tire replacement. Underinflation also increases tire

rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consumption.

3. Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability—

Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.

Overinflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.

Tire Inflation Pressures

The proper cold tire inflation pressure for passenger cars

is listed on either the face of the driver’s door or the

driver’s side “B” pillar. For vehicles other than passenger

cars, the cold tire inflation pressures are listed on either

the “B” pillar, the Certification Label or in the Tire

Inflation Pressures brochure in the glove compartment.

Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure

Information for vehicle loads that are less than the

maximum loaded vehicle condition. These pressure conditions

will be found in the “Supplemental Tire Pressure

Information” section of this manual.

Tire Placard Location

The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as

inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least

once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to

check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement

when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look

properly inflated even when they are under inflated.


CAUTION!

After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always

reinstall the valve stem cap–if equipped. This

will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the

valve stem, which could damage the valve stem.

Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always

“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure

is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not

been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less than 1mile

(1 km) after a 3 hour period. The cold tire inflation

pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure

molded into the tire side wall.

Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range

of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with

temperature changes.

Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per

12° F (7° C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind

when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in

the winter.

STARTING AND OPERATING 207

Example: If garage temperature = 68° F (20° C) and the

outside temperature = 32° F (0° C) then the cold tire

inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),

which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12° F (7° C) for this

outside temperature condition.

Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)

during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure

build up or your tire pressure will be too low.

Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation

The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds

within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions

are such that the vehicle can be driven at high

speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very

important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle

loading may be required for high speed vehicle operation.

Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire

dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading

and cold tire inflation pressures.

5


208 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING!

High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum

load is dangerous. The added strain on your

tires could cause them to fail. You could have a

serious accident. Don’t drive a vehicle loaded to the

maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75

mph (120 km/h).

Radial-Ply Tires

WARNING!

Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires

on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle

poorly. The instability could cause an accident. Always

use radial ply tires in sets of four (or 6, in case

of trucks with dual rear wheels). Never combine

them with other types of tires.

Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in

the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your

authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs.

Tire Spinning

When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not

spin your vehicle’s wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h).

See the paragraph on Freeing A Stuck Vehicle in Section

6 of this manual.

WARNING!

Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated

by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage

or failure. A tire could explode and injure

someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster

than 35 mph (55 km/h) when you are stuck. And

don’t let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter

what the speed.


Tread Wear Indicators

Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires

to help you in determining when your tires should be

replaced.

These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread

grooves and will appear as bands when the tread depth

becomes 1/16 inch (2 mm). When the indicators appear

in 2 or more adjacent grooves, the tire should be replaced.

Many states have laws requiring tire replacement at this

point.

STARTING AND OPERATING 209

Replacement Tires

The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many

characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for

wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manufacturer

strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent

to the originals in size, quality and performance

when replacement is needed (see the paragraph on tread

wear indicators). Refer to the Tire and Loading Information

placard for the size designation of your tire. The

service description and load identification will be found

on the original equipment tire. Failure to use equivalent

replacement tires may adversely affect the safety, handling,

and ride of your vehicle. We recommend that you

contact your original equipment or an authorized tire

dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications

or capability.

5


210 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING!

• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than

that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations

of unapproved tires and wheels may change

suspension dimensions and performance characteristics,

resulting in changes to steering, handling,

and braking of your vehicle. This can cause

unpredictable handling and stress to steering and

suspension components. You could lose control

and have an accident resulting in serious injury or

death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load

ratings approved for your vehicle.

• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or

capacity, other than what was originally equipped

on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load

index could result in tire overloading and failure.

You could lose control and have an accident.

• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having

adequate speed capability can result in sudden

tire failure and loss of vehicle control.

CAUTION!

Replacing original tires with tires of a different size

may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.

Alignment And Balance

Poor suspension alignment may result in:

• Fast tire wear.

• Uneven tire wear, such as feathering and one-sided

wear.

• Vehicle pull to right or left.

Tires may also cause the vehicle to pull to the left or right.

Alignment will not correct this condition. See your dealer

for proper diagnosis.

Improper alignment will not cause vehicle vibration.

Vibration may be a result of tire and wheel out-ofbalance.

Proper balancing will reduce vibration and

avoid tire cupping and spotty wear.


TIRE CHAINS

If driving conditions require tire chains for your vehicle,

chains that meet SAE class “S” requirements can be used,

but they must be installed on 245/45ZR20 size tires.

Contact your local dealership or tire dealer for these tire

sizes.

STARTING AND OPERATING 211

CAUTION!

To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the

following precautions:

• Because of restricted chain clearance between tires

and other suspension components, it is important

that only chains in good condition are used. Broken

chains can cause serious damage. Stop the vehicle

immediately if noise occurs that could indicate chain

breakage. Remove the damaged parts of the chain

before further use.

• Install chains on the rear wheels as tightly as possible

and then retighten after driving about 1 ⁄2 mile

(0.8 km).

• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).

• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large

bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.

• Only use on rear wheels.

• Do not drive for prolonged period on dry pavement.

• Observe the tire chain manufacturer’s instructions

on the method of installation, operating speed, and

conditions for use. Always use the lower suggested

operating speed of the chain manufacturer if different

than the speed recommended by the manufacture.

5


212 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE: In order to avoid damage to tires, chains, and

your vehicle do not drive for a prolonged period of time

on dry pavement. Observe the tire chain manufacturer’s

instructions on method of installation, operating speed,

and conditions for usage.

Always use the lower suggested operating speed if both

the chain manufacturer and vehicle manufacture suggest

a maximum speed. This notice applies to all chain

traction devices, including link and cable (radial) chains.

SNOW TIRES

Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires

during winter. Standard tires are of the all season type

and satisfy this requirement as indicated by the M+S

designation on the tire side wall.

If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and

type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only

in sets of 4, failure to do so may adversely affect the

safety and handling of your vehicle.

Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what

was originally equipped with your vehicle and should

not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120

km/h).

TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS

Follow the recommended tire rotation frequency for your

type of driving found in the “Maintenance Schedules”

Section of this manual. More frequent rotation is permissible

if desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual

wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed.


Tire Rotation — Standard Tires

The suggested rotation method is the “side-to-side”

shown in the following diagram.

STARTING AND OPERATING 213

Tire Rotation — All Season Tires

The suggested rotation method for vehicles equipped

with all season tires is the “forward-cross” shown in the

following diagram.

Tire Rotation — General Information

Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at

different loads and perform different steering, driving,

and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at

unequal rates, and tend to develop irregular wear patterns.

5


214 STARTING AND OPERATING

These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.

The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with

aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type

tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain

mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to a

smooth, quiet ride.

GROUND CLEARANCE

CAUTION!

Damage to the front and rear fascias can occur if you

disregard the low ground clearance in the front and

rear of this vehicle. Pay close attention when parking

to avoid running into parking curbs. Exercise caution

when entering or exiting steep driveways or when

pulling off the road onto soft shoulders.

FUEL REQUIREMENTS

Your vehicle is designed to meet all emission

regulations and provide excellent fuel

economy when using high quality premium

unleaded gasoline having an octane

rating of 91 or higher.

Spark Knock

Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to

your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at

high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is

required.

Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard

starting, stalling and hesitations. If you experience these

symptoms, try another brand of “premium” gasoline

before considering service for the vehicle.

Over 40 automobile manufacturers around the world

have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications

(the World Wide Fuel Charter, WWFC) to define

fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions,

engine performance, and durability for your vehicle. The

manufacturer recommends the use of gasolines that meet

the WWFC specifications if they are available.


Reformulated Gasoline

Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner

burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”.

Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates, and are specifically

blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve

air quality.

The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gasolines.

Properly blended reformulated gasolines will provide

excellent performance and durability of engine and

fuel system components.

Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends

Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygenates

such as 10% ethanol, MTBE, and ETBE. Oxygenates

are required in some areas of the country during the

winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions.

Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in

your vehicle.

STARTING AND OPERATING 215

CAUTION!

DO NOT use gasolines containing Methanol. Use of

these blends may result in starting and driveability

problems and may damage critical fuel system components.

Problems that result from using methanol/gasoline

blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer.

While MTBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol, it

does not have the negative effects of Methanol.

MMT In Gasoline

MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is

blended into some gasoline to increase the octane number.

Gasolines blended with MMT offer no performance

advantage beyond gasolines of the same octane number

without MMT. Gasolines blended with MMT have shown

to reduce spark plug life and reduce emission system

performance in some vehicles. The manufacturer recommends

using gasolines without MMT. Since the MMT

5


216 STARTING AND OPERATING

content of gasoline may not be indicated on the pump,

you should ask your gasoline retailer whether or not

his/her gasoline contains MMT.

It is even more important to look for gasolines without

MMT in Canada, because MMT can be used at levels

higher than those allowed in the United States.

MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformulated

gasolines.

Materials Added to Fuel

All gasoline sold in the United States is required to

contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional

detergents or other additives are not needed under

normal conditions and would result in additional cost.

Therefore you should not have to add anything to the

fuel.

Fuel System Cautions

CAUTION!

Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s

performance:

• The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.

Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance,

or damage the emission control system.

• An out-of-tune engine, or certain fuel or ignition

malfunctions, can cause the catalytic converter to

overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or

some light smoke, your engine may be out-of-tune or

malfunctioning and may require immediate service.

Contact your dealer for service assistance.

• The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as

octane enhancers are not recommended. Most of these

products contain high concentrations of methanol.


Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems

resulting from the use of such fuels or additives are not

the responsibility of the manufacturer.

NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control

systems can result in civil penalties being assessed

against you.

Carbon Monoxide Warnings

WARNING!

Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.

Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon

monoxide poisoning:

• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon

monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas which can kill.

Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a

garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the

engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle is

stopped in an open area with the engine running for

more than a short period, adjust the ventilation system

to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.

STARTING AND OPERATING 217

• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance.

Have the exhaust system inspected every time

the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions

repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side

windows fully open.

• Keep the trunk closed when driving your vehicle to

prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous exhaust

gases from entering the vehicle.

5


218 STARTING AND OPERATING

ADDING FUEL

Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)

The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the

left side of the vehicle. Push in on the left side (near the

edge) of the fuel filler door to access the fuel filler cap. If

the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure the replacement

cap is for use with this vehicle.

Fuel Filler Door

CAUTION!

Damage to the fuel system or emission control

system could result from using an improper fuel

tank filler tube cap (gas cap), and may result in a

malfunction indicator light on the instrument cluster.

A poorly fitting cap could let impurities into the

fuel system.

CAUTION!

To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top

off” the fuel tank after filling. When the fuel nozzle

“clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.


NOTE:

• Tighten the gas cap until you hear a “clicking” sound.

This is an indication that the gas cap is properly

tightened. If the gas cap is not secured properly the

Malfunction Indicator Light in the instrument cluster

will turn on. Make sure that the gas cap is tightened

each time the vehicle is refueled.

• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel

tank is full.

WARNING!

• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near

the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the

tank filled.

• Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is

running.

• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a

portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You

could be burned. Always place gas containers on

the ground while filling.

STARTING AND OPERATING 219

VEHICLE LOADING

The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown in the

charts that follow. This information should be used for

passenger and luggage loading as indicated.

If the seatbacks are folded for carrying cargo, do not

exceed the specified GVWR and GAWR.

Vehicle Certification Label

Your vehicle has a certification label attached to the rear

of the driver’s door.

The label contains the following information:

• Name of manufacturer

• Month and year of manufacture

• Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)

• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front

• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear

• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

• Type of Vehicle

• Month Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH)

5


220 STARTING AND OPERATING

The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)

The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.

This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total

load must be limited so that you do not exceed the

GVWR.

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)

The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear

axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles

evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or

rear GAWR.

WARNING!

Because the front wheels steer the vehicle, it is

important that you do not exceed the maximum front

or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can

result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose

control of the vehicle and have an accident.

Overloading

The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires,

wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory

service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and front

and rear GAWR.

The best way to figure out the total weight of your

vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for

operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to insure that it

is not over the GVWR.

Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle

separately. It is important that you distribute the load

evenly over the front and rear axles.

Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and

shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension

components do not necessarily increase the vehicle’s

GVWR.

Loading

To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty

weight, axle by axle and side by side. Store heavier items

down low and be sure you distribute their weight as

evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely before


driving. If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you

have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is within

the specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight.

Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect

on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way

the brakes operate.

A loaded vehicle is shown in the illustration. Note that

neither the GVWR or the GAWR capacities have been

exceeded.

STARTING AND OPERATING 221

Front

Axle

Empty Weight 2054 lbs

(932 kg)

Load (Including driver, pass- 271 lbs

sengers and cargo)

(123 kg)

Total 2325 lbs

(1055 kg)

GAWR 2546 lbs

(1155 kg)

Rear Axle

1805 lbs

(819 kg )

579 lbs

(263 kg)

2384 lbs

(1081 kg)

2708 lbs

(1228 kg)

NOTE: Refer to the Vehicle Certification Label attached

to the rear of the driver’s door for your vehicle’s GVWR

and GAWRs. This table is only an example.

5


222 STARTING AND OPERATING

RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND

MOTORHOME, ETC.)

TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER

VEHICLE (Flat towing with all four wheels on the

ground)

Recreational towing for this vehicle is not recommended.

NOTE: If the vehicle requires towing make sure all four

wheels are off the ground.


CONTENTS

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

Hazard Warning Flasher .................224

If Your Engine Overheats ................225

TIREFIT Tire Repair ....................226

Jump-Starting Procedures If Battery Is Low ...229

Driving On Slippery Surfaces .............231

▫ Acceleration .........................231

▫ Traction ............................232

Freeing A Stuck Vehicle .................232

Towing A Disabled Vehicle ...............233

▫ With Ignition Key .....................233

▫ Without The Ignition Key ...............234

▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle

(Flat Towing With All Four Wheels On The

Ground) ............................234

▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle

With A Tow Dolley ....................234

6


224 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER

The hazard flasher switch is located in the center of the

instrument panel between the center air outlets.

Hazard Flasher Switch

To engage the Hazard Warning Flashers, depress the

switch on the instrument panel. When the Hazard Warning

Switch is activated, all directional turn signals will

flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency.

Push the switch a second time to turn off the

flashers.

This is an emergency warning system and should not be

used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your

vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for

other motorists.

When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the

Hazard Warning Flashers will continue to operate even

though the ignition switch is OFF.

NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning Flashers

may wear down your battery.


IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS

In any of the following situations, you can reduce the

potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.

• On the highways — Slow down.

• In city traffic — While stopped, put transmission in

neutral, but do not increase engine idle speed.

NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down

an impending overheat condition. If your air conditioner

is on, turn it off. The air conditioning system adds heat to

the engine cooling system and turning off the A/C

removes this heat. You can also turn the Temperature

control to maximum heat, the Mode control to floor, and

the fan control to High. This allows the heater core to act

as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat

from the engine cooling system.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 225

CAUTION!

Driving with a hot cooling system could damage

your vehicle. If temperature gauge reads “H”, pull

over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the

air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops

back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on

the “H”, turn the engine off immediately, and call for

service.

WARNING!

A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or

others could be badly burned by steam or boiling

coolant. You may want to call a service center if your

vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the

hood yourself, see Section 7, Maintenance, of this

manual. Follow the warnings under the Cooling

System Pressure Cap paragraph.

6


226 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

TIREFIT TIRE REPAIR

Small punctures, particularly those in the tread, can be

sealed with TIREFIT. Foreign objects (e.g., screws or

nails) should not be removed from the tire. TIREFIT can

be used in outside temperatures down to approximately

-4°F (-20°C).

The TIREFIT system is located under an access panel in

the rear compartment

TIREFIT Location

TIREFIT contents

1. Air pump hose

2. Power plug and cable

3. Air pump switch

4. Pressure gauge

5. TIREFIT sealant bottle

6. TIREFIT sealant hose


WARNING!

• Do not attempt to repair a tire on the side of the vehicle

close to traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid the

danger of being hit when operating the jack or repairing a

tire.

• Cuts or punctures larger than approximately 0.16 in. (4 mm),

tire damage caused by driving with extremely low tire

pressure or on a flat tire, or a damaged wheel can pose a

hazard while driving. TIREFIT should not be used in such

circumstances. Do not drive the vehicle under such circumstances.

Contact your nearest authorized dealer for assistance.

• Take care not to allow the contents of TIREFIT to come in

contact with hair, eyes or clothing. TIREFIT is harmful if

inhaled, swallowed or absorbed through the skin: It causes

skin, eye and respiratory irritation. Any contact with eyes or

skin should be flushed immediately with plenty of water. If

clothing comes in contact with TIREFIT, change clothing as

soon as possible.

• In case of allergic reaction or rash, consult a physician

immediately. Keep TIREFIT out of reach of children. If

swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with plenty of water

and drink plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting! Consult

a physician immediately.

Keep away from open flame or heat source.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 227

Sealing tire with TIREFIT

1. Set the parking brake and turn on the hazard warning

flashers.

Hazard Flasher Switch

2. Move the transmission selector lever to the PARK

position and turn off the engine.

3. Remove the TIREFIT kit from the rear compartment.

4. Pull the power plug (2) and air hose (1) out from the

TIREFIT kit.

6


228 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

5. Unscrew the valve cap from the valve on the deflated tire.

6. Screw the filler hose (6) from the sealant bottle (5) on

the tire valve.

7. Insert the power plug (2) into the power point on the

instrument panel.

8. Turn the ignition key to the ON/RUN position.

9. Press the switch (3) on the air pump to 1. The air pump

should start to inflate the tire.

10. After five minutes, the tire should be inflated to at

least 26 psi (1.8 bar) on the pressure gauge (4).

11. If the tire doesn’t inflate to this level, press the air

pump switch (3) to 0, disconnect the TIREFIT system

from the tire, and drive the vehicle back and forth

approximately 30 feet (9.1 m) to distribute the sealant

more evenly within the tire.

12. Attach the air pump hose (1) directly to the tire, press

the switch (3) to 1, and inflate the tire again. NOTE: If a

tire pressure of 26 psi (1.8 bar) is not reached after five

minutes, the tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to

drive the vehicle further, and call for assistance.

13. If a tire pressure of 26 psi (1.8 bar) is obtained, press

the air pump switch (3) to 0, turn the ignition switch to

the OFF/LOCK position, and disconnect the TIREFIT

system.

14. Drive the vehicle for about 10 minutes to ensure

optimum distribution of the tire sealant within the tire.

15. Check the pressure in the tire. If the pressure is above

19 psi (1.3 bar), inflate the tire to the pressure indicated

on the tire pressure label on the driver side latch pillar.

16. Have the tire inspected at the earliest opportunity at

an authorized dealer or tire service center.

NOTE:

• If a pressure of at least 19 psi (1.3 bar) cannot be

maintained in the tire, the tire is too badly damaged.

Do not attempt to drive the vehicle further, and call for

assistance.

• Do not operate the electric air pump for more than

eight minutes to avoid overheating. The air pump may

be used again once it has cooled down.


• Replace the TIREFIT sealant bottle (5) once every four

years to assure optimum operation of the system.

• If TIREFIT is liquid, clean water and a damp cloth will

remove the material from the vehicle or tire and wheel

components. Once TIREFIT sealing material has dried,

it can easily be peeled off and properly discarded.

• Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) until the tire has

been inspected.

JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES IF BATTERY IS

LOW

WARNING!

Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever

the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition

switch is on. You can be hurt by the fan.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 229

WARNING!

• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it

started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission

cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel

could enter the catalytic converter and once the

engine has started, ignite and damage the converter

and vehicle. If the vehicle has a discharged battery,

booster cables may be used to obtain a start from

another vehicle. This type of start can be dangerous

if done improperly, so follow this procedure carefully.

• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution; do not

allow battery fluid to contact eyes, skin or clothing.

Don’t lean over battery when attaching clamps or

allow the clamps to touch each other. If acid splashes

in eyes or on skin, flush contaminated area immediately

with large quantities of water.

• A battery generates hydrogen gas which is flammable

and explosive. Keep flame or spark away from

the vent holes. Do not use a booster battery or any

other booster source with an output that exceeds 12

volts.

6


230 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

NOTE: The battery is stored under an access cover in

the trunk. Remote battery terminals are located in the

engine compartment for jump starting.

NOTE: The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that

should not be disconnected and should only be replaced

with a battery of the same type (vented).

1. Wear eye protection and remove any metal jewelry

such as watch bands or bracelets that might make an

inadvertent electrical contact.

2. When boost is provided by a battery in another

vehicle, park that vehicle within booster cable reach and

without letting the vehicles touch. Set the parking brake,

place the automatic transmission in PARK and turn the

ignition switch to the OFF (or LOCK) position for both

vehicles.

3. Turn off the heater, radio and all unnecessary electrical

loads.

4. Connect one end of the jumper cable to the remote

jump start positive battery post (A) in the engine compartment.

Connect the other end of the same cable to the

positive terminal of the booster battery. Refer to the

following illustration for jump starting connections.

5. Connect the other cable, first to the negative terminal

of the booster battery and then to the engine ground (B)

of the vehicle with the discharged battery. Make sure

you have a good contact on the engine ground. Refer to

the following illustration for jump starting connections.

6. Start the engine in the vehicle which has the booster

battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, then start the

engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.


7. When removing the jumper cables, reverse the above

sequence exactly. Be careful of the moving belts and fan.

Jump Starting

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 231

DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES

Acceleration

Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slippery

surfaces may cause the rear wheels to pull erratically

to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when

there is a difference in the surface traction under the rear

(driving) wheels.

WARNING!

Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.

Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of

the rear wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle

and possibly have an accident. Accelerate slowly and

carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction

(ice, snow, wet mud, loose sand, etc.).

6


232 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

Traction

When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a

wedge of water to build up between the tire and road

surface. This is known as hydroplaning and may cause

partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping

ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precautions

should be observed:

1. Slow down during rainstorms or when roads are

slushy.

2. Slow down if road has standing water or puddles.

3. Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become

visible.

4. Keep tires properly inflated.

5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and

the vehicle in front to avoid a collision in a sudden stop.

FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE

If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it

can often be moved by a rocking motion. Turn your

steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the

front wheels. Then shift back and forth between Reverse

and Drive. Usually the least accelerator pedal pressure to

maintain the rocking motion without spinning the

wheels is most effective.

NOTE: Turn off the Electronic Stability Program (ESP)

— if equipped, or Traction Control System (TCS) — if

equipped before rocking the vehicle. Refer to Electronic

Stability Program, or Traction Control System in your

Owner’s Manual for Details.


WARNING!

Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated

by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage

or failure. A tire could explode and injure

someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster

than 35 mph (55 km/h) when you are stuck. And

don’t let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter

what the speed.

CAUTION!

Racing the engine or spinning the wheels too fast

may lead to transmission overheating and failure. It

can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels

above 35 mph (55 km/h).

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 233

TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE

With Ignition Key

Your vehicle may be towed under the following conditions:

The gear selector must be in NEUTRAL, the

distance to be traveled must not exceed 30 miles (48 km),

and the towing speed must not exceed 30 mph (48

km/h). Exceeding these towing limits may cause a transmission

geartrain failure. If the transmission is not operative,

or if the vehicle is to be towed more than 30 miles

(48 km), the vehicle must be transported using a flat bed

or the drive shaft disconnected at the rear axle drive

flange.

6


234 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

CAUTION!

• Do not attempt to tow this vehicle from the front

with sling type towing equipment. Damage to the

front fascia will result.

• The only approved method of towing is with a flat

bed truck.

• Do not tow the vehicle from the rear. Damage to

the rear sheet metal, and fascia will occur.

• Do not push or tow this vehicle with another

vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and transmission

may result.

If it is necessary to use the accessories while being towed

(wipers, defrosters, etc.), the key must be in the ON

position, not the ACCESSORY position. Make certain the

transmission remains in NEUTRAL.

Without The Ignition Key

Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed

with the ignition in the LOCK position. The only approved

method of towing with out the ignition key is

with a flat bed truck. Proper towing equipment is necessary

to prevent damage to the vehicle.

TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER

VEHICLE (Flat towing with all four wheels on the

ground)

Flat towing of vehicles equipped with an automatic

transmission, is only permitted within the limitations

described in this section.

TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER

VEHICLE WITH A TOW DOLLEY

The manufacture does not recommend that you tow this

vehicle on a tow dolley. Vehicle damage may occur.


CONTENTS

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

6.1L Engine ..........................237

Onboard Diagnostic System — OBD II ......238

Emissions Inspection And Maintenance

Programs ............................239

Replacement Parts .....................240

Dealer Service ........................240

Maintenance Procedures .................241

▫ Engine Oil ..........................241

▫ Engine Oil Filter ......................243

▫ Drive Belts — Check Condition And

Tensioner ...........................244

▫ Spark Plugs .........................244

▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter ................244

▫ Fuel Filter ..........................245

▫ Catalytic Converter ....................245

▫ Maintenance-Free Battery ................247

▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance .............248

▫ A/C Air Filter — If Equipped ............249

▫ Power Steering — Fluid Check ............249

▫ Front & Rear Suspension Ball Joints ........250

▫ Steering Linkage ......................250

▫ Body Lubrication .....................250

▫ Windshield Wiper Blades ................250

7


236 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

▫ Windshield Washers/Headlight Washers .....251

▫ Exhaust System ......................251

▫ Cooling System .......................252

▫ Hoses And Vacuum/Vapor Harnesses .......256

▫ Brakes .............................257

▫ Brake Fluid Level Check ................258

▫ Fuel System Hoses ....................259

▫ Automatic Transmission ................259

▫ Front And Rear Wheel Bearings ...........260

▫ Appearance Care And Protection

From Corrosion ......................260

▫ Cleaning The Center Console Cup Holders . . . 264

Power Distribution Centers ...............264

▫ Front Power Distribution Center ...........264

▫ Rear Power Distribution Center ...........266

Vehicle Storage ........................268

Replacement Light Bulbs ................269

Bulb Replacement ......................270

▫ Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam Headlamp,

And Park/Turn Lamp ..................270

▫ Tail/Stop, Tail, Turn Signal Lamp, And Backup

Lamp ..............................272

▫ License Lamp ........................274

Fluids And Capacities ...................275

Recommended Fluids, Lubricants And

Genuine Parts .........................276

▫ Engine .............................276

▫ Chassis ............................276


6.1L ENGINE

6.1L Engine Compartment

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 237

7


238 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II

Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard

diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors

the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic

transmission control systems. When these systems are

operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent

performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions

well within current government regulations.

If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system

will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light.” It will

also store diagnostic codes and other information to

assist your service technician in making repairs. Although

your vehicle will usually be drivable and not

need towing, see your dealer for service as soon as

possible.

CAUTION!

Prolonged driving with the “Malfunction Indicator

Light” on could cause further damage to the emission

control system. It could also affect fuel economy

and driveability. The vehicle must be serviced before

any emissions tests can be performed.

If the “Malfunction Indicator Light” is flashing

while the engine is running, severe catalytic converter

damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate

service is required.


EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

PROGRAMS

In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass

an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.

Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.

For states which have an I/M (Inspection and

Maintenance) requirement, this check verifies the

following: the MIL (Malfunction Indicator Lamp)

is functioning and is not on when the engine is running,

and that the OBD (On Board Diagnostic) system is ready

for testing.

Normally, the OBD system will be ready. The OBD

system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently

serviced, if you recently had a dead battery, or a battery

replacement. If the OBD system should be determined

not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.

Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test

which you can use prior to going to the test station. To

check if your vehicle’s OBD system is ready, you must do

the following:

1. Insert your ignition key into the ignition switch.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 239

2. Turn the ignition to the ON position, but do not crank

or start the engine.

3. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start

this test over.

4. As soon as you turn your key to the ON position, you

will see your MIL symbol come on as part of a normal

bulb check.

5. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will

happen:

a. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then

return to being fully illuminated until you turn off

the ignition key or start the engine. This means that

your vehicle’s OBD system is not ready and you

should not proceed to the I/M station.

b. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully

illuminated until you turn off the ignition key or

start the engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD

system is ready and you can proceed to the I/M

station.

7


240 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

If your OBD system is not ready, you should see your

authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was

recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,

you may need to do nothing more than drive your

vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD

system to update. A recheck with the above test routine

may then indicate that the system is now ready.

Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD system is

ready or not ready, if the MIL symbol is illuminated

during normal vehicle operation, you should have your

vehicle serviced before going to the I/M station. The I/M

station can fail your vehicle because the MIL symbol is on

with the engine running.

REPLACEMENT PARTS

Use of genuine Mopar parts for normal/scheduled

maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to insure

the designed performance. Damage or failures

caused by the use of non-Mopar parts for maintenance

and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s

warranty.

DEALER SERVICE

Your dealer has the qualified service personnel, special

tools and equipment to perform all service operations in

an expert manner. Service Manuals are available which

include detailed service information for your vehicle.

Refer to these manuals before attempting any procedure

yourself.

NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control

systems can result in civil penalties being assessed

against you.

WARNING!

You can be badly injured working on or around a

motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which

you have the knowledge and the proper equipment.

If you have any doubt about your ability to perform

a service job, take your vehicle to a competent

mechanic.


MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES

The pages that follow contain the required maintenance

services determined by the engineers who designed your

vehicle.

Besides the maintenance items for which there are fixed

maintenance intervals, there are other items that should

operate satisfactorily without periodic maintenance.

However, if a malfunction of these items does occur, it

could adversely affect the engine or vehicle performance.

These items should be inspected if a malfunction is

observed or suspected.

Engine Oil

Checking Oil Level

To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must

be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at

regular intervals, such as every fuel stop.

The best time to check the engine oil level is about 5

minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off or before

starting the engine after it has sat overnight.

Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will

improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 241

the oil level in the “SAFE” range. Adding one quart of oil

when the reading is at the bottom of the “SAFE” range

will result in an oil level at the top of the “SAFE” range

on these engines.

NOTE: Fill engine oil one quart at a time.

Engine Oil Dipstick

7


242 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!

Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or

loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.

CAUTION!

Operating the engine with the oil levels below the

safe zone, or operating with oil levels that exceed the

top of the safe zone may cause engine damage.

Change Engine Oil

Road conditions and your kind of driving affects the

interval at which your oil should be changed. Check the

following list to see if any apply to you.

• Day or night temperatures are below 32°F (0°C).

• Stop and Go driving.

• Extensive engine idling.

• Driving in dusty conditions.

• Short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km).

• More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high

speeds during hot weather, above 90°F (32°C).

• Trailer towing.

• Taxi, Police or delivery service (commercial service).

• Off-Road or desert operation.

NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you then change your

engine oil every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months,

whichever comes first and follow schedule “B” of the

Maintenance Schedules section of this manual.

If none of these apply to you, then change your engine oil

at every interval shown on schedule A of the Maintenance

Schedules section of this manual.

NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change

intervals exceed 6000 miles (10 000 km) or 6 months

whichever comes first.

Engine Oil Selection

For best performance and maximum protection under all

types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only

recommends full synthetic engine oils that are API rated


as SL/CF and meet the requirements of DaimlerChrysler

Material Standard MS-10725. Use Mopar or an equivalent

oil meeting the specification MS-10725.

The manufacturer recommends the use of a full synthetic

engine oil, such as Mobil 1 SAE 0W-40 or equivalent.

Engine Oil Viscosity Chart

The proper SAE viscosity grade of engine oil should be

selected based on the following recommendation and be

within the operating temperature shown in the engine oil

viscosity chart.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 243

Materials Added to Engine Oil

The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addition

of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to

the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and

it’s performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.

Disposing of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters

Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and

oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,

indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the

environment. Contact your dealer, service station, or

governmental agency for advice on how and where used

oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.

Engine Oil Filter

The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine

oil change.

Engine Oil Filter Selection

The manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil

filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality

of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high

7


244 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

quality filters should be used to assure most efficient

service. Mopar Engine Oil Filters are a high quality oil

filter and are recommended.

Drive Belts — Check Condition and Tensioner

Belt tension is controlled by means of an automatic

tensioner. No belt tension adjustments are required.

However, belt and belt tensioner condition should be

inspected at the specified intervals, and replaced if required.

See your authorized dealer for service.

At the mileage indicated in the maintenance schedule, all

belts and tensioner should be checked for condition.

Improper belt tension can cause belt slippage and failure.

Belts should be inspected for evidence of cuts, cracks,

glazing, or frayed cords and replaced if there is indication

of damage which could result in belt failure. Low generator

belt tension can cause battery failure.

Also check belt routing to make sure there is no interference

between the belts and other engine components.

Spark Plugs

Spark plugs must fire properly to assure engine performance

and emission control. New plugs should be installed

at the specified mileage. The entire set should be

replaced if there is any malfunction due to a faulty spark

plug. Malfunctioning spark plugs can damage the catalytic

converter. For proper type of replacement spark

plugs, refer to the “Vehicle Emission Control Information”

label in the engine compartment.

Engine Air Cleaner Filter

Under normal driving conditions, replace the air filter at

the intervals shown on Schedule “A”. If, however, you

drive the vehicle frequently under dusty or severe conditions,

the filter element should be inspected periodically

and replaced if necessary at the intervals shown on

Schedule “B”.


WARNING!

The air cleaner can provide a measure of protection

in the case of engine backfire. Do not remove the air

cleaner unless such removal is necessary for repair or

maintenance. Make sure that no one is near the

engine compartment before starting the vehicle with

the air cleaner removed. Failure to do so can result in

serious personal injury.

Fuel Filter

A plugged fuel filter can cause stalling, limit the speed at

which a vehicle can be driven or cause hard starting.

Should an excessive amount of dirt accumulate in the

fuel tank, filter replacement may be necessary. See your

local dealer for service.

Catalytic Converter

The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel

only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the

catalyst as an emission control device.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 245

Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter

will not require maintenance. However, it is important

to keep the engine properly tuned to assure

proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst

damage.

CAUTION!

Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your

vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In

the event of engine malfunction, particularly involving

engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance,

have your vehicle serviced promptly. Continued

operation of your vehicle with a severe

malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,

resulting in possible damage to the converter and the

vehicle.

NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control

systems can result in civil penalties being assessed

against you.

7


246 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over

materials that can burn. Such materials might be

grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust

system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in

areas where your exhaust system can contact anything

that can burn.

In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning

engine operation, a scorching odor may indicate severe

and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, the

vehicle should be stopped, the engine shut off and the

vehicle allowed to cool. Thereafter, service, including a

tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, should be obtained

immediately.

To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage:

• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition

when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in

motion.

• Do not try to start engine by pushing or towing the

vehicle.

• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires

disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic

testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough

idling or malfunctioning operating conditions.


Maintenance-Free Battery

Battery Location

The top of the MAINTENANCE-FREE battery is permanently

sealed. You will never have to add water, nor is

periodic maintenance required.

NOTE: The battery is stored under an access cover in

the trunk. Remote battery terminals are located in the

engine compartment for jump starting.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 247

NOTE: The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that

should not be disconnected and should only be replaced

with a battery of the same type (vented).

WARNING!

• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can

burn or even blind you. Don’t allow battery fluid

to contact your eyes, skin or clothing. Don’t lean

over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid

splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately

with large amounts of water.

• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep

flame or sparks away from the battery. Don’t use

a booster battery or any other booster source with

an output greater than 12 volts. Don’t allow cable

clamps to touch each other.

• Battery posts, terminals and related accessories

contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands

after handling.

7


248 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!

• It is essential when replacing the cables on the

battery that the positive cable is attached to the

positive post and the negative cable is attached to

the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive

(+) and negative (-) and identified on the

battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the

terminal posts and free of corrosion.

• If a “fast charger” is used while battery is in

vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables

before connecting the charger to battery. Do not

use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.

Air Conditioner Maintenance

For best possible performance, your air conditioner

should be checked and serviced by an Authorized Dealer

at the start of each warm season. This service should

include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance

test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this

time.

WARNING!

• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants

approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning

system. Some unapproved refrigerants are

flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other

unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause

the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer

to Section 3 of the Warranty Information book for

further warranty information.

• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant

under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal

injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant

or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected

should be done by an experienced repairman.


Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling

R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon

(HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection

Agency and is an ozone-saving product. However,

the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning

service be performed by dealers or other service facilities

using recovery and recycling equipment.

NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C System

Sealers, Stop Leak Products, Seal Conditioners, Compressor

Oil, or Refrigerants.

A/C Air Filter — If Equipped

The filter is located in the fresh air inlet under the hood,

behind a removable panel in the cowl on the passenger

side of the vehicle, next to the windshield wipers. When

installing a new filter, ensure its proper orientation. To

replace the filter remove the access door in the cowl

screen by pressing the retaining clips. Slide the lid on the

filter adapter forward and down and remove used filter.

Install new filter with arrows pointing in the direction of

airflow, which is toward the rear of the vehicle (text and

arrows on the filter indicate this).

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 249

Refer to the “Maintenance Schedules” section of this

manual for the recommended air conditioning filter

replacement intervals.

Power Steering — Fluid Check

Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined

service interval is not required. The fluid should only be

checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are

apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as anticipated.

Coordinate inspection efforts through a certified

DaimlerChrysler Dealership.

WARNING!

Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and

with the engine off to prevent injury from moving

parts and to insure accurate fluid level reading. Do

not overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended

power steering fluid.

7


250 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated

level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all

surfaces. Refer to Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and

Genuine Parts for correct fluid type.

Front & Rear Suspension Ball Joints

The suspension ball joints should be inspected for external

leakage or damage when other maintenance is performed.

Steering Linkage

The tie rod end ball joints should be inspected for

external leakage or damage when other maintenance is

performed.

Body Lubrication

Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as

seat tracks, doors, trunk and hood hinges, should be

lubricated periodically to assure quiet, easy operation

and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the application

of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be

wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating

excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular

attention should also be given to hood latching components

to insure proper function. When performing other

underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism

and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.

The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a

year, preferably in the fall and spring. Apply a small

amount of a high quality Mopar Lock Cylinder Lubricant

or equivalent directly into the lock cylinder.

Windshield Wiper Blades

The rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield

should be cleaned periodically with a sponge or soft cloth

and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations

of salt or road film.

Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods

may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use

washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt

from a dry windshield.

Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from

the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with

petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.


Windshield Washers/Headlight Washers

The windshield washer system and the headlamp washer

system share the same fluid reservoir. The reservoir is

located in the engine compartment and should be

checked for fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the

reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not radiator

antifreeze) and operate the system for a few seconds to

flush out the residual water.

The reservoir will hold a full gallon of fluid when the

Low Washer Fluid Light illuminates.

Exhaust System

The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into

the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust

system.

Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust

system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 251

vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is

damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete

exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,

damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open

seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes

to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,

inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised

for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.

WARNING!

Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon

monoxide (CO) which is colorless and odorless.

Breathing it can make you unconscious and can

eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, follow

the preceding safety tips.

7


252 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Cooling System

WARNING!

• When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect

the fan motor lead or turn the ignition

switch to the OFF position. The fan is temperature

controlled and can start at any time the ignition

switch is in the ON position.

• You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant

or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear

steam coming from under the hood, don’t open

the hood until the radiator has had time to cool.

Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap

when the radiator is hot.

Coolant Checks

Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12

months (before the onset of freezing weather, where

applicable). If coolant is dirty or rusty in appearance, the

system should be drained, flushed and refilled with fresh

coolant. Check the front of the A/C condenser for any

accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently

spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the

face of the condenser.

Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rubber,

cracking, tears, cuts and tightness of the connection at the

bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for leaks.

With the engine at normal operating temperature (but

not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for

proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of

coolant from the radiator drain cock. If the cap is sealing

properly, the engine coolant (antifreeze) will begin to

drain from the coolant recovery bottle. DO NOT RE-

MOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE

COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.

Cooling System — Drain, Flush and Refill

At the intervals shown on the Maintenance Schedules,

the system should be drained, flushed and refilled.

If the solution is dirty or contains a considerable amount

of sediment, clean and flush with a reliable cooling

system cleaner. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove

all deposits and chemicals. Properly dispose of old

antifreeze solution.


Selection Of Coolant

Use only the manufacturer’s recommended coolant, refer

to Recommended Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts

for correct coolant type.

CAUTION!

Mixing of coolants other than specified HOAT engine

coolants, may result in engine damage and may

decrease corrosion protection. If a non-HOAT coolant

is introduced into the cooling system in an

emergency, it should be replaced with the specified

coolant as soon as possible.

Do not use plain water alone or alcohol base engine

coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional

rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not

be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and

may plug the radiator.

This vehicle has not been designed for use with

Propylene Glycol based coolants. Use of Propylene

Glycol based coolants is not recommended.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 253

Adding Coolant

Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine

coolant that allows extended maintenance intervals. This

coolant can be used up to 5 Years or 100,000 miles before

replacement. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance

period, it is important that you use the same

coolant throughout the life of your vehicle. Please review

these recommendations for using Hybrid Organic Additive

Technology (HOAT) coolant.

When adding coolant, a minimum solution of 50% recommended

Mopar Antifreeze/ Coolant 5 Year/100,000

Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology),

or equivalent, in water should be used. Use higher

concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below

34°F (37°C ) are anticipated.

Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized

water when mixing the water/engine coolant solution.

The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of

corrosion protection in the engine cooling system.

7


254 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to maintain

the proper level of protection against freezing according

to the temperatures occurring in the area where

the vehicle is operated.

NOTE: Mixing coolant types will decrease the life of the

engine coolant and will require more frequent coolant

changes.

Cooling System Pressure Cap

The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of

coolant, and to insure that coolant will return to the

radiator from the coolant recovery bottle.

The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any

accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.

WARNING!

• The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on

the cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution.

Never add coolant when the engine is

overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to

cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure

to build up in the cooling system. To prevent

scalding or injury, do not remove the pressure cap

while the system is hot or under pressure.

• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one

specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or

engine damage may result.


Disposal of Used Engine Coolant

Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant is a regulated

substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your

local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your

community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children

do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant in open

containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the

ground. If ingested by a child, contact a physician

immediately. Clean up any ground spills immediately.

Coolant Level

The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for

determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the

engine off and cold, the level of the coolant in the bottle

should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle.

The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is

no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for

coolant freeze point or replacing coolant. Advise your

service attendant of this. As long as the engine operating

temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only

be checked once a month.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 255

When additional coolant is needed to maintain the

proper level, it should be added to the coolant bottle. Do

not overfill.

Points To Remember

NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles (a

few kilometers) of operation, you may observe vapor

coming from the front of the engine compartment. This is

normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high

humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized

when the thermostat opens, allowing hot coolant to

enter the radiator.

If an examination of your engine compartment shows no

evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be

safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.

• Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle.

• Check coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the

coolant recovery bottle. If antifreeze needs to be

added, contents of coolant recovery bottle must also be

protected against freezing.

7


256 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

• If frequent coolant additions are required, or if the

level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when

the engine cools, the cooling system should be pressure

tested for leaks.

• Maintain coolant concentration at 50% HOAT engine

coolant (minimum) and distilled water for proper

corrosion protection of your engine which contains

aluminum components.

• Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery

bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.

• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is

equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the

condenser clean, also.

• Do not change the thermostat for summer or winter

operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install

ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may

result in unsatisfactory coolant performance, poor gas

mileage, and increased emissions.

Hoses And Vacuum/Vapor Harnesses

Inspect surfaces of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence

of heat and mechanical damage. Hard or soft spots,

brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions, and excessive

swelling indicate deterioration of the rubber.

Pay particular attention to those hoses nearest to high

heat sources such as the exhaust manifold. Inspect hose

routing to be sure hoses do not come in contact with any

heat source or moving component which may cause heat

damage or mechanical wear.

Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or

collapsed.

Inspect all hose connections such as clamps and couplings

to make sure they are secure and no leaks are

present.

Components should be replaced immediately if there is

any evidence of wear or damage that could cause failure.


Brakes

In order to assure brake system performance, all brake

system components should be inspected periodically.

Suggested service intervals can be found in the Maintenance

Schedules section of this manual.

WARNING!

Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and

possibly an accident. Driving with your foot resting

or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally

high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and

possible brake damage. You wouldn’t have your full

braking capacity in an emergency.

Brake And Power Steering Hoses

When the vehicle is serviced for scheduled maintenance,

inspect surface of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence of

heat and mechanical damage. Hard and brittle rubber,

cracking, tears, cuts, abrasion, and excessive swelling

indicate deterioration of the rubber. Particular attention

should be made to examining those hose surfaces nearest

to high heat sources, such as the exhaust manifold.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 257

Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or

collapsed.

Inspect all hose connections such as clamps and couplings

to make sure they are secure and no leaks are

present.

NOTE: Often, fluid such as oil, power steering fluid,

and brake fluid are used during assembly plant operations

to facilitate the assembly of hoses to couplings.

Therefore, oil wetness at the hose-coupling area is not

necessarily an indication of leakage. Actual dripping of

hot fluid when systems are under pressure (during

vehicle operation), should be noted before a hose is

replaced based on leakage.

NOTE: Inspection of brake hoses should be performed

whenever the brake system is serviced and at every

engine oil change. Inspect hydraulic brake hoses for

surface cracking, scuffing, or worn spots. If there is any

evidence of cracking, scuffing, or worn spots, the hose

should be replaced immediately! Eventual deterioration

of the hose can take place resulting in a possibility of a

burst failure.

7


258 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

Worn brake hoses can burst and cause brake failure.

You could have an accident. If you see any signs of

cracking, scuffing, or worn spots, have the brake

hoses replaced immediately.

Brake Fluid Level Check

The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked

when performing underhood services, or immediately if

the brake system warning light indicates system failure.

Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing

the cap. Add fluid to bring the level up to the top of the

“FULL” mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir.

Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may

cause leaking in the system.

Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the requirements

described on the brake fluid reservoir. With disc

brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake

pads wear. However, low fluid level may be caused by a

leak and a checkup may be needed.

Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid, refer

to Recommended Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts

for correct fluid type.

WARNING!

• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in

spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the

brake fluid catching fire.

• Use of a brake fluid that has a lower initial boiling

point than the recommended MOPAR DOT 3

product or a brake fluid that is unidentified as to

FMVSS specification may result in sudden brake

failure during hard prolonged braking. You could

have an accident.

Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed

container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or

moisture.


CAUTION!

Do not allow petroleum base fluid to contaminate

the brake fluid, all brake seal components could be

damaged causing partial or complete brake failure.

Fuel System Hoses

Electronic Fuel Injection high pressure fuel systems are

designed with hoses and quick connect fittings which

have unique material characteristics to provide adequate

sealing and resist attack by deteriorated gasoline.

You are urged to use only the manufacturer’s specified

hoses with quick connect fittings, or their equivalent in

material and specification, in any fuel system servicing. It

is mandatory to replace any damaged hoses or quick

connect fittings that have been removed during service.

Care should be taken in installing quick connect fittings

to insure they are properly installed and fully connected.

See your authorized dealer for service.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 259

Automatic Transmission

Fluid Level Check

Regular automatic transmission fluid level checks are not

required. For this reason the dipstick is omitted.

If you notice fluid loss or gear shift malfunction, have

your authorized dealer check the transmission fluid level.

CAUTION!

Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s

recommended fluid may cause deterioration

in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter

shudder. Using a transmission fluid other than that

recommended by the manufacturer will result in

more frequent fluid and filter changes. Refer to the

Recommended Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts

section for correct fluid type.

7


260 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!

The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not

require adjustment under normal operating conditions.

If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your

authorized dealer immediately. Severe damage to the

transmission may occur. Your authorized dealer has

the proper tools to accurately adjust the fluid level.

Fluid and Filter Changes

Automatic transmission fluid and filter should be

changed as follows:

Maintenance schedule “A” — No change necessary.

Maintenance schedule “B” –Every 60,000 miles (96 000

km) change fluid and filter under the following conditions:

• Police, taxi, limousine, commercial type operation, or

trailer towing where the vehicle is driven regularly for

more than 45 minutes of continuous operation.

If the transmission is disassembled for any reason, the

fluid and filter should be changed.

Front And Rear Wheel Bearings

Front and rear wheel bearings are permanently sealed.

No regular maintenance is required for these components.

Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion

Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion

Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic

locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads

passable in snow and ice, and those that are sprayed on

trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are highly

corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,

which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,

road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme

hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will

have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody

protection.

The following maintenance recommendations will enable

you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion

resistance built into your vehicle.


What Causes Corrosion?

Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of

paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.

The most common causes are:

• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.

• Stone and gravel impact.

• Insects, tree sap and tar.

• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.

• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.

Washing

• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle

in the shade using a mild car wash soap, and

rinse the panels completely with clear water.

• If insects, tar or other similar deposits have accumulated

on your vehicle, wash it as soon as possible.

• Use Mopar auto polish or equivalent to remove road

film and stains and to polish your vehicle. Take care

never to scratch the paint.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 261

• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing

that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint

finish.

CAUTION!

Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials

such as steel wool or scouring powder, which will

scratch metal and painted surfaces.

Special Care

• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive

near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once

a month.

• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges

of the doors, rocker panels and trunk be kept clear and

open.

• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,

touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is

considered the responsibility of the owner.

7


262 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

• If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or

similar cause which destroys the paint and protective

coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible.

The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility

of the owner.

• All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and

chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly

with mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. To

remove heavy soil, select a nonabrasive, non-acidic

cleaner. Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle

brush or metal polishes. Only Mopar or equivalent

cleaners are recommended. Do not use oven cleaner.

Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions

or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels’ protective

finish.

• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,

de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well

packaged and sealed.

• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider

mud or stone shields behind each wheel.

• Use Mopar touch up paint or equivalent on scratches

as soon as possible. Your dealer has touch up paint to

match the color of your vehicle.

Interior Care

Use Mopar Fabric Cleaner or equivalent to clean fabric

upholstery and carpeting.

Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp

cloth, a damp cloth with a mild detergent, then MOPAR

Vinyl Cleaner or equivalent if absolutely necessary. Do

not use harsh cleaners or Armorall. Use Mopar Vinyl

Cleaner or equivalent to clean vinyl upholstery.

Mopar Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recommended

for leather upholstery.

Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular

cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt

can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery

and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.

Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth

and Mopar Total Clean or equivalent. Care should be

taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any

liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids,


solvents, detergents, or ammonia based cleaners to clean

your leather upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner

is not required to maintain the original condition.

WARNING!

Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.

Many are potentially flammable, and if used in

closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.

Glass Surfaces

All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis

with any commercial household-type glass cleaner.

Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution when

cleaning the inside rear window equipped with electric

defrosters and radio antenna. Do not use scrapers or

other sharp instruments which may scratch the elements.

When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the

towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner

directly on the mirror.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 263

Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses

The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are

molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care

must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.

1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be

used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive

cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp

rag.

2. Dry with a soft tissue.

Seat Belt Maintenance

Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical

solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.

Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.

If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or

lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the car to

wash them.

Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the

buckles do not work properly.

7


264 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Cleaning The Center Console Cup Holders

Clean with a damp cloth or towel using a mild detergent

with the cup holder in the center console.

NOTE: The cup holder cannot be removed.

POWER DISTRIBUTION CENTERS

Front Power Distribution Center

A power distribution center is located in the engine

compartment. This center contains fuses and relays.

Front Power Distribution Center

CAUTION!

• When installing the Power Distribution Center

cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly

positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so

may allow water to get into the Power Distribution

Center, and possibly result in a electrical

system failure.

• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to

use only a fuse having the correct amperage

rating. The use of a fuse with a rating other than

indicated may result in a dangerous electrical

system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues

to blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit

that must be corrected.

Front Power Distribution Center Fuses

Cavity Fuse Circuits

1 20 Amp Yellow

Left High Beam Headlight

2 20 Amp Yellow

Right High Beam Headlight


Cavity Fuse Circuits

3 — —

4 20 Amp Yellow

Horn

5 25 Amp Clear Headlamp Washer

6 15 Amp Dk.

Blue

Front Control Module (FCM)

7 20 Amp Yellow

Fog Lamp

8 15 Amp Dk.

Blue

Park Lamp

9 15 Amp Dk.

Blue

Non ABS Brakes

10 5 Amp Orange

Starter

11 15 Amp Dk. Auto Shutdown/Powertrain

Blue Control Module (PCM)

12 — —

13 — —

14 20 Amp Yellow

Powertrain Control Module

15 25 Amp Clear Injectors, Ignition Coils

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 265

Cavity Fuse Circuits

16 20 Amp Yellow

Powertrain Control Module

17 30 Amp Pink Antilock Brake System (ABS)

Valves

18 30 Amp Pink Windshield Wiper/Washer

19 50 Amp Red Radiator Fan

20 20 Amp Lt.

Blue

Starter

21 50 Amp Red ABS Pump Motor

22 40 Amp

Green

Radiator Fan High/Low

23 50 Amp Red High Intensity Lighting

24 60 Amp Yellow

Radiator Fan

25 30 Amp Pink Lighting Left High Beam/

Right Low Beam

26 — —

27 30 Amp Pink Lighting Left Low Beam/

Right High Beam

7


266 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Rear Power Distribution Center

There is also a power distribution center located in the

trunk under the spare tire access panel. This center

contains fuses and relays.

Rear Power Distribution Center

CAUTION!

• When installing the Power Distribution Center

cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly

positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so

may allow water to get into the Power Distribution

Center, and possibly result in a electrical

system failure.

• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to

use only a fuse having the correct amperage

rating. The use of a fuse with a rating other than

indicated may result in a dangerous electrical

system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues

to blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit

that must be corrected.

Rear Power Distribution Center Fuses

Cavity Fuse Circuits

1 60 Amp Clear Ignition Off Draw

2 40 Amp Green Battery

3 — —


Cavity Fuse Circuits

4 40 Amp Green Battery

5 30 Amp Pink Heated Seat/Steering

Column

6 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Pump

7 — —

8 15 Amp Dk.

Blue

Ignition Start/Run - Start

9 20 Amp Yellow Console Power Outlet

10 10 Amp Red Rear Fog Lamp — If

Equipped

11 25 Amp Memory Module/Door

C/BRKR Locks

12 25 Amp

C/BRKR

Passenger Power Seat

13 30 Amp Door Module Run/Acc/

C/BRKR Delay

14 10 Amp Red Sentry Key/Remote Keyless

Entry/Cluster

15 — —

16 — —

17 — —

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 267

Cavity Fuse Circuits

18 20 Amp Yellow Selectable Power Outlet

19 10 Amp Red Stop Lamp

20 — —

21 — —

22 — —

23 — —

24 — —

25 — —

26 — —

27 10 Amp Red Airbag/Occupant Classification

Module

28 10 Amp Red Curtain Airbag - if

equipped

29 5 Amp Orange Sentry Key/Remote Keyless

Entry/Powertrain

Control Module Ignition

Feed

30 10 Amp Red Steering Column

Module/Power Mirrors

31 — —

7


268 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Cavity Fuse Circuits

32 — —

33 — —

34 — —

35 5 Amp Orange Power Antenna/Garage

Door Opener/Ignition

Delay

36 20 Amp Yellow Radio/Navigation

37 15 Amp Dk.

Blue

Transmission

38 5 Amp Orange Analog Clock/Garage

Door Opener

39 10 Amp Red Heated Mirror

40 5 Amp Orange Power Mirror

41 10 Amp Red Climate Control Module/

Headlamp Leveling — if

equipped/Rear Park Assist

42 30 Amp Pink Automatic Temperature

Control (ATC) Blower

Motor

43 30 Amp Pink Rear Defroster

Cavity Fuse Circuits

44 20 Amp Lt.

Blue

Audio Amplifier

VEHICLE STORAGE

If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21

days you may want to take steps to protect your battery.

You may:

• Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.

• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of

service (i.e. vacation) for two weeks or more, run the

air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes

in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will

insure adequate system lubrication to minimize the

possibility of compressor damage when the system is

started again.


REPLACEMENT LIGHT BULBS

LIGHT BULBS — Interior Bulb Number

Rear Courtesy/Reading Lights. .............W5W

Rear Compartment (Trunk) Light .............579

Overhead Console Reading Lights. ............578

Visor Vanity Lights .....................A6220

Glove Box Light .........................194

Door Courtesy ..........................562

Shift Indicator Light .................JKLE14140

NOTE: For lighted switches, see your dealer for replacement

instructions.

All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glass

cartridge types. Aluminum base bulbs are not approved

and should not be used for replacement.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 269

LIGHT BULBS — Exterior Bulb Number

Low Beam Headlamp – High Intensity

Discharge (HID) ...........D1S(Serviced at Dealer)

High Beam Headlamp ....................9005

Front Park/Turn Lamp .................3157AK

Front Fog Lamp .......9145/H10 (Serviced at Dealer)

Front Sidemarker .........W5W(Serviced at Dealer)

Tail/Stop Lamp .........................3057

Tail Lamp .............................3057

Turn Signal Lamp .......................3057

Backup Lamp ..........................3057

Center High Mount Stop Lamp (CHMSL). ......LED

License ..............................W5W

7


270 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

BULB REPLACEMENT

Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam Headlamp, and

Park/Turn Lamp

High Intensity Discharge Headlights (HID)

The headlights are a type of high voltage discharge tube.

High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the

headlight switch off and the key removed. Because of

this, you should not attempt to service a headlight bulb

yourself. If a headlight bulb fails, take your vehicle to

an authorized dealer for service.

WARNING!

A transient high tension occurs at the bulb sockets of

High Intensity Discharge (HID) headlights when the

headlight switch is turned ON. It may cause serious

electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced properly.

See your authorized dealer for service.

NOTE: When HID headlights are turned on there is a

blue hue to the lights. This diminishes and becomes more

white after approximately 10 seconds, as the system

charges.

• Open the hood.

• Twist the appropriate bulb socket assembly counterclockwise

and pull out. Pull the bulb out of the socket

assembly.

NOTE: Removal of the air cleaner filter housing may be

necessary prior to replacing bulbs on driver’s side headlamp

assembly.


• Replace the bulb and push into socket assembly.

Reinstall the socket assembly, and turn clockwise.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 271

CAUTION!

Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil

contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the

bulb comes in contact with an oily surface, clean the

bulb with rubbing alcohol.

7


272 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Tail/Stop, Tail, Turn Signal Lamp, and Backup

Lamp

1. Open the Trunk.

2. Remove two fasteners from the back of the tail lamp

assembly.

3. Pull back the trunk liner.

4. Remove the remaining fastener from the back of the

tail lamp assembly.

5. Push the electrical connector locking tab to the side.

6. Disconnect the electrical connector.

7. Pull tail lamp assembly clear from vehicle to access

bulbs. Turn bulb sockets counter-clockwise to remove.


MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 273

7


274 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

8. Pull the appropriate bulb to remove it from the socket.

9. Replace the bulb, reinstall the socket, and reattach the

tail light assembly.

10. Close the trunk.

License Lamp

1. Remove the screws securing the light to the rear fascia.

2. Remove the bulb and socket assembly and pull the

bulb from the socket.


3. Replace the bulb and reinstall the bulb and socket

assembly.

4. Reattach the light to the rear fascia.

FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES

Fuel (approximate)

6.1 Liter Engines (Premium 91

Octane)

U.S. Metric

19 gallons

72 liters

Engine Oil-With Filter

6.1 Liter Engines (SAE 0W-40) 7 qts. 6.6 liters

Cooling System *

6.1 Liter Engines (Mopar

Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/

100,000 Mile Formula) or

equivalent.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 275

14.8 qts 14.0 liters

* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to

MAX level.

7


276 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

RECOMMENDED FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND

GENUINE PARTS

Engine

Component Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts

Engine Coolant Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid Organic

Additive Technology) or equivalent.

Engine Oil (6.1 Liter) Use API rated SL/CF full synthetic engine oil. SAE 0W-40 is recommended.

Refer to the engine oil viscosity chart for the correct SAE grade meeting

DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS-10725.

Spark Plugs Refer to the Vehicle Emission Control Information label in the engine compartment.

Oil Filter (6.1 Liter) Mopar 05281090 or equivalent.

Fuel Selection (6.1 Liter) Premium Unleaded 91 Octane Only or higher.

Chassis

Component Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts

Automatic Transmission Mopar ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent.

Brake Master Cylinder Mopar DOT 3 and SAE J1703 or equivalent should be used. Use only recommended

brake fluids.

Power Steering Reservoir Mopar ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent.

Rear Axle API rated GL-5 SAE 75W140 Synthetic Gear Lubricant or equivalent.


CONTENTS

Emission Control System Maintenance ......278

Maintenance Schedules ..................278

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

▫ Schedule “B” ........................281

▫ Schedule “A” ........................288

M AINTENANCE

S

C

H E

D

U LES

8


M AINTENANCE

S

C

H E

D

U LES

8

278 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

The “Scheduled” maintenance services, listed in bold

type must be done at the times or mileages specified to

assure the continued proper functioning of the emission

control system. These, and all other maintenance services

included in this manual, should be done to provide best

vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent maintenance

may be needed for vehicles in severe operating

conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip

driving.

Inspection and service also should be done any time a

malfunction is suspected.

NOTE: Maintenance, replacement, or repair of the

emission control devices and systems on your vehicle

may be performed by any automotive repair establishment

or individual using any automotive part which has

been certified pursuant to U.S. EPA or, in the State of

California, California Air Resources Board regulations.

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

There are two maintenance schedules that show the

required service for your vehicle.

First is Schedule “B”. It is for vehicles that are operated

under the conditions that are listed below and at the

beginning of the schedule. Change the automatic transmission

fluid and filter every 60,000 miles (96 000 km) if

the vehicle is usually operated under one or more of the

conditions marked with an .

• Day or night temperatures are below 32° F (0° C).

• Stop and go driving.

• Extensive engine idling.

• Driving in dusty conditions.

• Short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km).

• More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high

speeds during hot weather, above 90° F (32° C).

• Trailer towing.


• Taxi, police, or delivery service (commercial service).

• Off-road or desert operation.

NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you then change your

engine oil every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months,

whichever comes first and follow schedule “B” of the

Maintenance Schedules section of this manual.

NOTE: IF ANY of these apply to you then flush and

replace the engine coolant every 102,000 miles (164,000

km) or 60 months, whichever comes first, and follow

schedule B of the Maintenance Schedules section of this

manual.

NOTE: Most vehicles are operated under the conditions

listed for Schedule B.

Second is Schedule “A”. It is for vehicles that are not

operated under any of the conditions listed under Schedule

B.

Use the schedule that best describes your driving conditions.

Where time and mileage are listed, follow the

interval that occurs first.

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 279

NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change

intervals exceed 6000 miles (10 000 km) or 6 months

whichever comes first.

CAUTION!

Failure to perform the required maintenance items

may result in damage to the vehicle.

At Each Stop for Fuel

• Check the engine oil level about 5 minutes after a fully

warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level while

the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy

of the oil level reading. Add oil only when the

level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark.

• Check the windshield washer solvent and add if

required.

M AINTENANCE

S

C

H E

D

U LES

8


M AINTENANCE

S

C

H E

D

U LES

8

280 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

Once a Month

• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or

damage.

• Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals

as required.

• Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir, brake

master cylinder, and transmission and add as needed.

• Check all lights and all other electrical items for correct

operation.

• Check rubber seals on each side of the radiator for

proper fit.

At Each Oil Change

• Change the engine oil filter.

• Inspect the exhaust system.

• Inspect the brake hoses.

• Inspect the CV joints and front and rear suspension

components.

• Check the automatic transmission fluid level.

• Check the coolant level, hoses, and clamps.


SCHEDULE “B”

Follow schedule “B” if you usually operate your vehicle

under one or more of the following conditions. Change

the automatic transmission fluid and filter every 60,000

miles (96 000 km) if the vehicle is usually operated under

one or more of the conditions marked with an .

• Day or night temperatures are below 32° F (0° C).

• Stop and go driving.

• Extensive engine idling.

• Driving in dusty conditions.

• Short trips of less than 10 miles (16.2 km).

• More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high

speeds during hot weather, above 90° F (32° C).

• Trailer towing.

• Taxi, police or delivery service (commercial services).

• Off-road or desert operation.

SCHEDULE “B” 281

• If equipped for and operating with E-85 (ethanol)

fuel.

NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you then change your

engine oil every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months,

whichever comes first and follow schedule “B” of the

Maintenance Schedules section of this manual.

NOTE: IF ANY of these apply to you then flush and

replace the engine coolant every 102,000 miles (164,000

km) or 60 months, whichever comes first, and follow

schedule B of the Maintenance Schedules section of this

manual.

M AINTENANCE

S

C

H E

D

U LES

8


M AINTENANCE

S

C

H E

D

U LES

8

282 SCHEDULE “B”

Miles 3,000 6,000 9,000 12,000 15,000 18,000

(Kilometers) (5 000) (10 000) (15 000) (20 000) (25 000) (30 000)

Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not

replaced at 3 months.

X X X X X X

Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if required.*

X X X X X

Replace the air cleaner filter. * X

Inspect the front and rear brake linings and

rotors.

X X

Replace the air conditioning filter. X

Rotate the tires. X X X


SCHEDULE “B” 283

Miles 21,000 24,000 27,000 30,000 33,000 36,000

(Kilometers) (35 000) (40 000) (45 000) (50 000) (55 000) (60 000)

Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not

replaced at 3 months.

X X X X X X

Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if required.*

X X X X X

Replace the air cleaner filter. X

Inspect the front and rear brake linings and

rotors.

X X

Check and replace, if necessary, the PCV

valve. *

X

Replace the air conditioning filter. X

Rotate the tires. X X X

M AINTENANCE

S

C

H E

D

U LES

8


M AINTENANCE

S

C

H E

D

U LES

8

284 SCHEDULE “B”

Miles 39,000 42,000 45,000 48,000 51,000 54,000

(Kilometers) (65 000) (70 000) (75 000) (80 000) (85 000) (90 000)

Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not

replaced at 3 months.

X X X X X X

Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if required.*

X X X X X

Replace the air cleaner filter. * X

Inspect the front and rear brake linings and

rotors.

X X

Change the rear axle fluid. X

Replace the air conditioning filter. X

Rotate the tires. X X X


SCHEDULE “B” 285

Miles 57,000 60,000 63,000 66,000 69,000 72,000

(Kilometers) (95 000) (100 000) (105 000) (110 000) (115 000) (120 000)

Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not

replaced at 3 months.

X X X X X X

Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if required.*

X X X X X

Replace the air cleaner filter. X

Inspect the front and rear brake linings and

rotors.

X X

Check and Inspect the accessory drive belt

and tensioner. Replace if required.

X

Check and replace, if necessary, the PCV

valve. *‡

X

Change the power steering fluid. X

Change the automatic transmission fluid and

filter.

X

Replace the air conditioning filter. X

Flush and replace engine coolant at 60 months

if not done at 102,000 miles.

X

Rotate the tires. X X X

M AINTENANCE

S

C

H E

D

U LES

8


M AINTENANCE

S

C

H E

D

U LES

8

286 SCHEDULE “B”

Miles 75,000 78,000 81,000 84,000 87,000 90,000

(Kilometers) (125 000) (130 000) (135 000) (140 000) (145 000) (150 000)

Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not

replaced at 3 months.

X X X X X X

Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if required.*

X X X X

Replace the air cleaner filter. * X

Replace the air cleaner filter. X

Inspect the front and rear brake linings and

rotors.

X X

Check and replace, if necessary, the PCV

valve. *‡

X

Replace the air conditioning filter. X X

Rotate the tires. X X X


SCHEDULE “B” 287

Miles 93,000 96,000 99,000 100,000 102,000 105,000

(Kilometers) (155 000) (160 000) (165 000) (170 000) (175 000) (180 000)

Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not replaced

at 3 months.

X X X X X

Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if required.*

X X X

Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if required.

X

Replace the air cleaner filter. X

Replace the spark plugs. X

Inspect the front and rear brake linings and rotors. X

Check and Inspect the accessory drive belt and tensioner.

Replace if required.

X

Change the rear axle fluid. X

Replace the air conditioning filter. X

Flush and replace engine coolant at 102,000 miles if

not done at 60 months.

X

Rotate the tires. X X

* This maintenance is recommended by the manufacture Inspection and service should also be performed anytime

to the owner but is not required to maintain the emis- a malfunction is observed or suspected. Retain all resions

warranty.

‡ This maintenance is not required if previously replaced.

ceipts.

M AINTENANCE

S

C

H E

D

U LES

8


M AINTENANCE

S

C

H E

D

U LES

8

288 SCHEDULE “A”

SCHEDULE “A”

Miles 6,000 12,000 18,000 24,000 30,000 36,000

(Kilometers) (10 000) (20 000) (30 000) (40 000) (50 000) (60 000)

[Months] [6] [12] [18] [24] [30] [36]

Change engine oil and engine oil filter. X X X X X X

Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if required.*

X X X X X

Replace the air cleaner filter. X

Inspect the front and rear brake linings and

rotors.

X X

Replace the air conditioning filter. X X X

Rotate the tires. X X X X X X


SCHEDULE “A” 289

Miles 42,000 48,000 54,000 60,000 66,000 72,000

(Kilometers) (70 000) (80 000) (90 000) (100 000) (110 000) (120 000)

[Months] [42] [48] [54] [60] [66] [72]

Change engine oil and engine oil filter. X X X X X X

Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if

required.*

X X X X X

Replace the air cleaner filter. X

Inspect the front and rear brake linings and

rotors.

X X

Check and Inspect the accessory drive belt

and tensioner. Replace if required.

X

Flush and replace engine coolant at 60 months

if not done at 102,000 miles.

X

Check and replace, if necessary, the PCV

valve. *

X

Replace the air conditioning filter. X X X

Rotate the tires. X X X X X X

M AINTENANCE

S

C

H E

D

U LES

8


M AINTENANCE

S

C

H E

D

U LES

8

290 SCHEDULE “A”

Miles 78,000 84,000 90,000 96,000 100,000 102,000

(Kilometers) (130 000) (140 000) (150 000) (160 000) (170 000) (180 000)

[Months] [78] [84] [90] [96] [102]

Change engine oil and engine oil filter. X X X X X

Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if required.*

X X X X

Replace the air cleaner filter. X

Replace the spark plugs. X

Inspect the front and rear brake linings and rotors.

X

Check and Inspect the accessory drive belt and

tensioner. Replace if required.

X

Check and replace, if necessary, the PCV valve.

*‡

X

Flush and replace the engine coolant at 102,000

miles if not done at 60 months.

X

Replace the air conditioning filter. X X

Rotate the tires. X X X X X

* This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer

to the owner but is not required to maintain the emissions

warranty.

‡ This maintenance is not required if previously replaced.

Inspection and service should also be performed anytime

a malfunction is observed or suspected. Retain all receipts.


WARNING!

You can be badly injured working on or around a

motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which

you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If

you have any doubt about your ability to perform a

service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.

SCHEDULE “A” 291

M AINTENANCE

S

C

H E

D

U LES

8


CONTENTS

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your

Vehicle ..............................294

▫ Prepare For The Appointment ............294

▫ Prepare A List ........................294

▫ Be Reasonable With Requests .............294

If You Need Assistance ..................294

Warranty Information ...................297

Mopar Parts .........................299

Reporting Safety Defects .................299

▫ In Canada ..........................299

Publication Order Forms .................299

Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire

Quality Grades ........................301

▫ Treadwear ..........................301

▫ Traction Grades ......................301

▫ Temperature Grades ...................3029


294 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR

YOUR VEHICLE

Prepare For The Appointment

If you’re having warranty work done, be sure to have the

right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All

work to be performed may not be covered by the

warranty, discuss additional charges with the service

manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s

service history. This can often provide a clue to the

current problem.

Prepare A List

Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the

specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident,

or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the

service advisor know.

Be Reasonable With Requests

If you list a number of items, and you must have your

vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with

the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.

At many dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a

minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is advisable

to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment.

IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE

The manufacturer and its dealers are vitally interested in

your satisfaction. We want you to be happy with our

products and services.

Warranty service must be done by an authorized

Chrysler, Dodge, or Jeep dealer. We strongly recommend

that you take your vehicle to you selling dealer. They

know you and your vehicle best, and are most concerned

that you get prompt and high quality service. The

manufacturer’s dealers have the facilities, factory-trained

technicians, special tools, and the latest information to

assure your vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely

manner.

This is why you should always talk to your dealer’s

service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with

this process.


• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the

general manager or owner of the dealership. They

want to know if you need assistance.

• If your dealership is unable to resolve the concern, you

may contact the Manufacturer’s Customer Center.

Any communication to the Manufacturer’s Customer

Center should include the following information:

• Owner’s name and address

• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)

• Dealership name

• Vehicle identification number

• Vehicle delivery date and mileage

DaimlerChrysler Motors Corporation Customer

Center

P.O. Box 21–8004

Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004

Phone: (800) 992-1997

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 295

DaimlerChrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center

P.O. Box 1621

Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6

Phone —(800) 465–2001

In Mexico contact:

Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240

Sante Fe C.P. 05109

Mexico, D. F.

In Mexico (915) 729–1248 or 729–1240

Outside Mexico (525) 729–1248 or 729–1240

Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech

Impaired (TDD/TTY)

To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the

manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication

Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its Customer

Center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer who

has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter

(TTY) in the United States can communicate with the

manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.

9


296 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

Service Contract

You may have purchased a service contract for your

vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected

repairs after your manufacturer’s new vehicle

limited warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind

only the manufacturer’s Service Contracts. If you

purchased a manufacturer’s Service Contract, you will

receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card

in the mail within three weeks of your vehicle delivery

date. If you have any questions about your service

contract, call the manufacturer’s Service Contract National

Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922.

The manufacturer will not stand behind any service

contract that is not the manufacturer’s Service Contract. It

is not responsible for any service contract other than the

manufacturer’s Service Contract. If you purchased a

service contract that is not a manufacturer’s Service

Contract, and you require service after your manufacturer’s

new vehicle limited warranty expires, please refer to

your contract documents, and contact the person listed in

those documents.

We appreciate that you have made a major investment

when you purchased your new vehicle. Your dealer has

also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and

training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with

your ownership experience. You’ll be pleased with their

sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related

concerns.


WARRANTY INFORMATION

See your manufacturer’s Warranty Information Booklet

for information on warranty coverage.

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 297

9


298 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

U.S. ONLY


MOPAR PARTS

Mopar fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are

available from your dealer. They will help you keep your

vehicle operating at its best.

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

In the 50 United States and Washington D.C.: If you

believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause

a crash or cause injury or death, you should immediately

inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration

(NHTSA) in addition to notifying the manufacturer.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an

investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in

a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy

campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in

individual problems between you, your dealer, and the

manufacturer.

To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety

Hotline toll free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in Washington

DC area) or write to: NHTSA, U.S. Dept. of

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 299

Transportation, Washington DC 20590. You can also

obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from

the Hotline.

In Canada:

If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you

should contact the Customer Service Department immediately.

Canadian customers who wish to report a safety

defect to the Canadian government should write to

Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations

and Recalls, 2780 Sheffield Road, Ottawa, Ontario K1B

3V9.

PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS

To order the following manuals, you may use either the

website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard,

American Express, and Discover orders are accepted.

If you prefer mailing your payment, please call

for an order form.

NOTE: A street address is required when ordering

manuals. (No P.O. Boxes).

9


300 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

• Service Manuals.

These comprehensive service manuals provide the

information that students and professional technicians

need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving,

maintaining, servicing and repairing DaimlerChrysler

Corporation vehicles. A complete working knowledge

of the vehicle, system and/or components is written in

straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams

and charts.

• Diagnostic Procedure Manuals.

Filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations,

these practical manuals make it easy for students and

technicians to find and fix problems on computercontrolled

vehicle systems and features. They show

exactly how to find and correct problems the first time,

using step-by-step troubleshooting and driveability

procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a complete list

of all tools and equipment.

• Owner’s Manuals.

These manuals have been prepared with the assistance

of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you

with specific Chrysler group vehicles. Included are

starting, operating, emergency and maintenance procedures

as well as specifications, capabilities and

safety tips.

Call Toll Free at 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.) or 1–800–387–1143

(Canada)

Or

Visit us on the World Wide Web at:

www.techauthority.daimlerchrysler.com or

www.daimlerchrysler.ca/manuals


DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM

TIRE QUALITY GRADES

The following describes the tire grading categories established

by the National highway Traffic Safety Administration.

The specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s

manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall

of the tires on your car.

All Passenger Car Tires Must Conform to Federal Safety

Requirements in Addition to These Grades.

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the

wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions

on a specified government test course. For example,

a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1

1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire

graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends

upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and

may depart significantly from the norm due to variations

in driving habits, service practices and differences in road

characteristics and climate.

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 301

Traction Grades

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are A, B, and

C, and they represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet

pavement as measured under controlled conditions on

specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.

A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

WARNING!

The traction grade is based on braking (straightahead)

traction tests and does not include cornering

(turning) performance.

9


302 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

Temperature Grades

The temperature grades are A (highest), B, and C, representing

the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and

its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled

conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.

Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the

tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive

temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C

corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger

car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle

Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent

higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel

than the minimum required by law.

WARNING!

The temperature grade is established for a tire that is

properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive

speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either

separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup

and possible tire failure.


INDEX

10


304 INDEX

ABS (Anti-Lock Brake) System ............. 193

Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ......... 253

Adding Fuel .......................... 218

Adding Washer Fluid .............. 104,106,251

Additives, Fuel ........................ 216

Adjustable Pedals ....................... 94

Air Conditioner Maintenance .............. 248

Air Conditioning Filter ................ 177,249

Air Conditioning, Operating Tips ........... 178

Air Conditioning Refrigerant .............. 249

Air Pressure, Tires ...................... 206

Airbag ................................ 35

Airbag Deployment .................... 40,45

Airbag Light .................... 40,47,57,135

Airbag Maintenance ...................... 47

Airbag, Side ........................... 44

Airbag, Window ...................... 36,44

Alarm System .......................... 22

Alignment and Balance .................. 210

Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle ............ 7

Antenna, Satellite Radio .................. 165

Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ............ 253,275

Disposal ............................ 255

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ............. 193

Anti-Lock Warning Light ................. 135

Anti-Theft Security Alarm ................. 22

Appearance Care ....................... 260

Auto Down Power Windows ............... 24

Auto Up Power Windows ................. 24

Automatic Dimming Mirror ................ 63

Automatic Door Locks .................... 17

Automatic Headlights ................... 100

Automatic Temperature Control ............ 171

Automatic Transmission ............ 183,259,260

Adding Fluid ..................... 260,276

Fluid and Filter Changes ................ 260

Fluid Change ........................ 260

Fluid Level Check ..................... 259

Fluid Type .......................... 276

Autostick .......................... 185,190

Ball Joints ............................ 250

Battery ............................... 247

Jump Starting ........................ 229

Keyless Transmitter Replacement .......... 21

Location ......................... 230,247


Bearings .............................. 260

Belts, Drive ........................... 244

Body Mechanism Lubrication .............. 250

B-Pillar Location ....................... 201

Brake Assist System ..................... 108

Brake, Parking ......................... 191

Brake System ....................... 193,257

Anti-Lock ........................... 193

Fluid Check ...................... 258,276

Hoses .............................. 257

Warning Light ....................... 136

Brake/Transmission Interlock .............. 190

Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle ...... 56

Bulb Replacement ...................... 270

Bulbs, Light ........................... 269

Calibration, Compass .................... 143

Capacities, Fluid ....................... 275

Caps, Filler

Fuel ............................... 218

Radiator (Coolant Pressure) .............. 254

Car Washes ........................... 261

Carbon Monoxide Warning ............. 56,217

INDEX 305

Cargo Tie-Downs ....................... 126

Cassette Tape and Player Maintenance ....... 169

Catalytic Converter ..................... 245

CD Player ............................ 151

Cellular Phone .......................... 66

Chains, Tire ........................... 211

Chart, Tire Sizing ....................... 198

Child Restraint ................... 49,51,53,54

Child Restraint Tether Anchors ............. 53

Child Safety Locks ....................... 18

Clean Air Gasoline ...................... 215

Climate Control ........................ 171

Clock ............................. 151,152

Compact Disc Maintenance ............... 170

Compass ............................. 143

Compass Calibration .................... 143

Compass Variance ...................... 144

Computer, Trip/Travel ................... 142

Console .............................. 126

Console, Floor ......................... 126

Console, Overhead ...................... 114

Contract, Service ....................... 296

Coolant Pressure Cap .................... 254

10


306 INDEX

Cooling System ........................ 252

Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ............. 253

Coolant Capacity ..................... 275

Coolant Level ..................... 252,255

Disposal of Used Coolant ............... 255

Drain, Flush, and Refill ................. 252

Inspection ........................... 255

Points to Remember ................... 255

Pressure Cap ........................ 254

Radiator Cap ........................ 254

Selection of Coolant ............. 253,275,276

Cruise Control (Speed Control) ............. 111

Cup Holder ........................ 125,264

Customer Assistance .................... 294

Data Recorder, Event ..................... 47

Dealer Service ......................... 240

Defroster, Windshield .................. 57,175

Delay (Intermittent) Wipers ............... 104

Diagnostic System, Onboard ............... 238

Dimmer Switch, Headlight ................ 101

Disposal

Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ............. 255

Door Locks ............................ 15

Door Locks, Automatic ................... 17

Door Opener, Garage .................... 115

Drive Belts ............................ 244

Driver’s Seat Glide Feature ................ 91

Driving

On Slippery Surfaces .................. 231

Electric Remote Mirrors ................... 64

Electrical Power Outlets .................. 123

Electronic Speed Control .................. 111

Electronic Stability Program ............... 109

Electronic Vehicle Information Center ........ 140

Emergency, In Case of

Freeing Vehicle When Stuck ............. 232

Hazard Warning Flasher ................ 224

Jump Starting ........................ 229

Overheating ......................... 225

Towing ............................. 233

Emission Control System Maintenance .... 239,278

Engine ............................... 237

Air Cleaner .......................... 245

Air Cleaner Filter ..................... 244


Break-In Recommendations ............... 56

Checking Oil Level .................... 241

Compartment ........................ 237

Coolant (Antifreeze) ................ 252,276

Cooling ............................ 252

Exhaust Gas Caution ................ 56,217

Fails to Start ......................... 182

Fuel Requirements ................. 214,275

Oil .......................... 241,275,276

Oil Change Interval ................... 242

Oil Selection ...................... 242,275

Overheating ......................... 225

Temperature Gauge ................... 137

Engine Oil Viscosity ..................... 243

Engine Oil Viscosity Chart ................ 243

Enhanced Accident Response Feature ......... 46

Event Data Recorder ..................... 47

Exhaust Gas Caution ............... 56,217,251

Exhaust System ........................ 251

Exterior Folding Mirrors .................. 64

Filters

Air Cleaner .......................... 244

INDEX 307

Air Conditioning .................. 177,249

Engine Fuel ......................... 245

Engine Oil ....................... 243,276

Engine Oil Disposal ................... 243

Flashers

Hazard Warning ...................... 224

Turn Signal .......................... 134

Flash-To-Pass .......................... 101

Floor Console .......................... 126

Fluid Capacities ........................ 275

Fluid Leaks ............................ 58

Fluid Level Checks

Brake .............................. 258

Cooling System ....................... 252

Engine Oil .......................... 241

Power Steering ....................... 249

Fluids ............................... 276

Fog Lights ......................... 101,134

Folding Rear Seat ....................... 93

Freeing A Stuck Vehicle .................. 232

Fuel ................................. 214

Adding ............................. 218

Additives ........................... 216

10


308 INDEX

Clean Air ........................... 215

Filler Cap ........................... 218

Filter .............................. 245

Gasoline ............................ 214

Gauge ............................. 138

Hoses .............................. 259

Octane Rating ........................ 276

Requirements ..................... 214,275

Tank Capacity ........................ 275

Fueling .............................. 218

Fuses ................................ 264

Garage Door Opener .................... 115

GasCap .............................. 218

Gasoline ............................. 214

Gasoline, Clean Air ..................... 215

Gasoline, Reformulated .................. 215

Gauges

Coolant Temperature .................. 137

Fuel ............................... 138

Speedometer ......................... 134

Tachometer .......................... 134

General Information ................. 15,20,213

Glass Cleaning ......................... 263

Gross Axle Weight Rating ................. 220

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ............... 220

Ground Clearance ...................... 214

Hands-Free Phone ....................... 66

Hazard Warning Flasher .................. 224

Head Restraints ......................... 92

Headlight Washers ................... 105,251

Headlights ............................ 270

High Beam .......................... 101

High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ...... 101

On With Wipers ................... 100,104

Passing ............................. 101

Switch ............................ 98,99

Time Delay .......................... 100

Washers ......................... 105,251

Heated Seats ........................... 88

High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . 101

Holder, Cup ........................... 125

Homelink Transmitter ................... 115

Hood Release .......................... 95

Horn ................................. 12


Hoses ............................ 256,259

Ignition

Key ................................ 11

Illuminated Entry ....................... 15

Immobilizer ............................ 12

Infant Restraint ......................... 49

Information Center, Vehicle ............... 140

Instrument Cluster ................... 133,134

Instrument Panel and Controls ............. 132

Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ............ 263

Interior Appearance Care ................. 262

Interior Fuses .......................... 264

Interior Lights .......................... 97

Intermittent Wipers ..................... 104

Introduction ............................ 4

Jump Starting ......................... 229

Key, Programming ....................... 14

Key, Replacement ....................... 13

Key, Sentry ............................ 12

Key-In Reminder ........................ 12

INDEX 309

Keyless Entry System ..................... 19

Keys ................................. 11

Knee Bolster ........................... 35

Lap/Shoulder Belts ...................... 29

LATCH

(Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren) ..... 53

Latch Plate ............................ 30

Latches

Hood ............................... 95

Lead Free Gasoline ...................... 214

Lights .............................. 58,97

Airbag ....................... 40,47,57,135

Anti-Lock ........................... 135

Automatic Headlights .................. 100

Brake Warning ....................... 136

Bulb Replacement ..................... 269

Courtesy/Reading ..................... 97

Daytime Running ..................... 100

Dimmer Switch, Headlight ............ 99,101

Engine Temperature Warning ............ 135

Fog ............................. 101,134

Hazard Warning Flasher ................ 224

10


310 INDEX

Headlight Switch ...................... 99

Headlights ........................ 99,270

Headlights On With Wipers .......... 100,104

High Beam .......................... 101

High Beam Indicator ................... 138

Illuminated Entry ...................... 15

Instrument Cluster ..................... 99

Interior .............................. 97

License ............................. 274

Lights On Reminder ................... 100

Malfunction Indicator .................. 139

Oil Pressure ......................... 134

Reading ............................ 114

Seat Belt Reminder .................... 138

Service .......................... 269,270

Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator) . 139

Turn Signal ........................ 99,101

Voltage ............................. 139

Loading Vehicle ..................... 219,220

Capacities ........................... 220

Tires ............................... 201

Locks

Door ............................... 15

Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren

(LATCH) .............................. 53

Lubrication, Body ....................... 250

Lumbar Support ........................ 88

Maintenance Free Battery ................. 247

Maintenance Procedures .................. 241

Maintenance Schedule ................... 278

Schedule A ......................... 288

Schedule B ......................... 281

Malfunction Indicator Light ............ 139,239

Manual, Service ........................ 299

Memory Feature ........................ 89

Mini-Trip Computer ..................... 142

Mirrors ............................... 63

Automatic Dimming .................... 63

Electric Remote ....................... 64

Exterior Folding ....................... 64

Heated .............................. 65

Outside ............................. 64

Vanity .............................. 65

Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle ............ 7

Mopar Parts ........................ 240,299


Multi-Function Control Lever ............... 99

Navigation System ...................... 166

New Vehicle Break-In Period ............... 56

Occupant Restraints ...................... 28

Oil, Engine ......................... 241,276

Capacity ............................ 275

Change Interval ...................... 242

Checking ........................... 241

Disposal ............................ 243

Filter ........................... 243,276

Filter Disposal ....................... 243

Materials Added to .................... 243

Recommendation .................. 242,275

Viscosity ............................ 275

Onboard Diagnostic System ............ 238,239

Opener, Garage Door .................... 115

Operator Manuals (Owner’s Manuals) ......... 4

Overhead Console ...................... 114

Overheating, Engine .................. 137,225

Owner’s Manual ...................... 4,299

INDEX 311

Panic Alarm ........................... 20

Park Assist System, Rear .................. 85

Parking Brake ......................... 191

Parking On Hill ........................ 192

Passing Light .......................... 101

Pedals, Adjustable ....................... 94

Personal Settings ....................... 147

Pets .................................. 55

Phone, Cellular ......................... 66

Phone, Hands-Free ....................... 66

Placard, Tire and Loading Information ....... 201

Power

Brakes ............................. 193

Distribution Center .................... 264

Door Locks .......................... 16

Mirrors ............................. 64

Outlet .............................. 123

Seats ............................... 87

Steering ............................ 196

Steering, Checking .................... 249

Sunroof ............................ 120

Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column ......... 106

Windows ............................ 23

10


312 INDEX

Pregnant Women and Seat Belts ............. 34

Pretensioners

Seat Belts ............................ 33

Programmable Electronic Features ..... 115,119,147

Programming Transmitters ............. 115,119

Radial Ply Tires ........................ 208

Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) ........ 254

Radio Broadcast Signals .................. 168

Radio Operation ..................... 151,171

Radio Remote Controls .................. 166

Radio, Satellite ......................... 163

Radio (Sound Systems) ................... 151

Rain Sensitive Wiper System .............. 103

Rear Park Assist System ................... 85

Rear Seat, Folding ....................... 93

Reclining Front Seats ..................... 88

Recommended Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine

Parts ............................... 276

Recorder, Event Data ..................... 47

Recreational Towing ..................... 222

Refrigerant ............................ 249

Reminder, Seat Belt ...................... 33

Remote Keyless Entry .................... 19

Remote Sound System Controls ............ 166

Remote Trunk Release .................... 26

Replacement Tires ...................... 209

Reporting Safety Defects ................. 299

Restraint, Head ......................... 92

Restraints, Occupant ..................... 28

Rocking Vehicle When Stuck .............. 232

Rotation, Tires ......................... 212

Safety Checks Inside Vehicle ............... 57

Safety Checks Outside Vehicle .............. 57

Safety Defects, Reporting ................. 299

Safety Information, Tire .................. 197

Safety Tips ............................. 56

Satellite Radio ......................... 163

Satellite Radio Antenna .................. 165

Schedule, Maintenance ................... 278

Seat Belt Maintenance ................... 263

Seat Belt Reminder ...................... 33

Seat Belts .............................. 29

Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage ...... 32

And Pregnant Women .................. 34


Child Restraint ...................... 49,54

Extender ............................ 34

Front Seat ............................ 29

Operating Instructions .................. 29

Pretensioners ......................... 33

Reminder ........................... 138

Seats ................................. 87

Glide-To-Exit ......................... 91

Heated .............................. 88

Lumbar Support ....................... 88

Power .............................. 87

Rear Folding ......................... 93

Reclining ............................ 88

Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) ............... 22

Selection of Coolant .................. 253,276

Selection of Oil ........................ 242

Sentry Key ............................ 12

Service Assistance ...................... 294

Service Contract ........................ 296

Service Engine Soon Light

(Malfunction Indicator) .................. 139

Service Manuals ........................ 299

Setting the Clock .................... 151,152

INDEX 313

Settings, Personal ....................... 147

Shift Speeds ........................... 183

Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage ............. 32

Side Airbag ............................ 44

Signals, Turn .......................... 134

Slippery Surfaces, Driving On ............. 231

Snow Chains (Tire Chains) ................ 211

Snow Tires ............................ 212

Spark Plugs ........................... 244

Speed Control ......................... 111

Speedometer .......................... 134

Starting .............................. 181

Engine Fails to Start ................... 182

Starting and Operating ................... 181

Steering

Linkage ............................ 250

Power ........................... 196,249

Tilt Column ......................... 106

Wheel, Tilt .......................... 106

Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System

Controls ............................ 166

Storage ........................... 126,268

Storage, Vehicle ..................... 177,268

10


314 INDEX

Storing Your Vehicle ..................... 268

Sun Roof ............................. 120

Sunglass Storage ....................... 114

Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag ....... 35

System, Navigation ..................... 166

Tachometer ........................... 134

Telescoping Steering Column .............. 106

Temperature Control, Automatic ............ 171

Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant ...... 137,225

Theft Alarm ............................ 22

Theft System ........................... 22

Tie Down Hooks, Cargo .................. 126

Tilt Steering Column .................... 106

Tire and Loading Information Placard ....... 201

Tire Identification Number (TIN) ........... 200

Tire Markings ......................... 197

Tire Safety Information ................... 197

TIREFIT .............................. 226

Tires ........................... 57,205,301

Air Pressure ......................... 205

Alignment .......................... 210

Chains ............................. 211

General Information ................... 205

High Speed ......................... 207

Inflation Pressures .................... 206

Load Capacity .................... 201,202

Quality Grading ...................... 301

Radial ............................. 208

Replacement ......................... 209

Rotation ............................ 212

Safety ........................... 197,205

Sizes ............................... 198

Snow Tires .......................... 212

Spinning ............................ 208

Tread Wear Indicators .................. 209

Towing

Behind a Motor Home ................. 222

Disabled Vehicle ...................... 233

Recreational ......................... 222

Towing Vehicle Behind a Motor Home ....... 222

Traction Control ........................ 107

Traction Control Switch .................. 107

Transmission .......................... 259

Automatic ........................ 183,259

Fluid .............................. 276


Shifting ............................ 183

Transmitter Battery Service ................ 21

Transmitter, Garage Door Opener ........... 115

Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry ........... 19

Transporting Pets ........................ 55

Tread Wear Indicators ................... 209

Trip Odometer Reset Button ............... 138

Trunk Release, Emergency ................. 27

Trunk Release Remote Control .............. 26

Turn Signals ........................ 101,134

Uniform Tire Quality Grades .............. 301

Universal Transmitter .................... 115

Unleaded Gasoline ...................... 214

Vanity Mirrors .......................... 65

Variance, Compass ...................... 144

Vehicle Certification Label ................ 219

Vehicle Identification Number ............... 6

Vehicle Loading .................. 202,219,220

Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ............ 7

Vehicle Storage ...................... 177,268

Vehicle Theft Alarm ...................... 22

Viscosity, Engine Oil ..................... 243

INDEX 315

Warning Flasher, Hazard ................. 224

Warnings and Cautions .................... 6

Warr